726+,%$
Telecommunication Systems Division
Digital Business Telephone Solutions
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
Software Release 3.1
Software Release 4.3 and ACD
May 2000
Strata DK
exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your
line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company
General End User Information
to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
4. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ1CX, RJ2EX, RJ2GX,
The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the
RJ48C, RJ48X, RJ11, RJ14C, RJ21X (see Network Requirements in this
provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission's Rules and
document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
Regulations.
Radio Frequency Interference
FCC Requirements
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may
established rules which permit the Strata DK system to be connected directly to the
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company--
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
interference.
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
U
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
® L
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
call Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division
Important Notice -- Music-On-Hold
in Irvine, CA (949) 583-3700.
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
compatibility or use of the Strata DK system, the telephone company will notify you in
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata DK system to the
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
1. Your telephone number.
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
2. FCC registration number:
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
Strata DK may be configured as a Key or Hybrid telephone system. The
the Equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of
the system.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be registered as a Key telephone system.
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
service in some situations.
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
telephone system registration in some areas.
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
for assistance.
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
DK14 and DK40i
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Key system: CJ6MLA-74479-KF-E
Hybrid: CJ6MLA-74478-MF-E
DK424
CAUTION!
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
electrician, as appropriate.
PBX: CJCHN-22757-PF-E
DK424i
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
PBX: CJ6JPN-22758-PF-E
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
3. Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas,
but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not
Publication Information
© Copyright 2000
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
Telecommunication Systems Division
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means--graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems--without
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.
Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a registered
trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Strata AirLink, Call Center
Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
DKA-MA-IN/MT-VF
Version D.3, November 1998 (Update TBDK-0022)
4025070
Version D.2, October 1998 (Update TBDK-0021)
Version F, May 2000 (DK424i)
Version D.1, September 1998 (Update TBDK-0019)
Version E.1, November 1999 (DK424 Remote Cabinets)
Version C, October 1997
Version E, May 1999 (DK40i, Strata AirLink)
Version B, April 1997
Version D.4, January 1999 (Format change)
Version A.1, February 1997 (Update TB16-0003)
Version A, December 1996
Contents
Introduction
Organization.......................................................................................................................................... xv
Conventions......................................................................................................................................... xvii
Related Documents/Media .................................................................................................................xviii
General Descriptions ...................................................................................................................xviii
Installation and Programming .....................................................................................................xviii
Feature Description......................................................................................................................xviii
User Guides .................................................................................................................................xviii
Quick Reference Guides................................................................................................................ xix
CD-ROMs...................................................................................................................................... xix
Chapter 1 DK14 Installation
Inspection .............................................................................................................................................1-1
Packaging and Storage .........................................................................................................................1-1
Site Requirements ................................................................................................................................1-1
Input Power....................................................................................................................................1-2
Clearance and Location .................................................................................................................1-2
AC Power and Grounding Requirements.............................................................................................1-3
AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test ........................................................................................1-4
Alternate or Additional Ground.....................................................................................................1-4
KSU Mounting Considerations ............................................................................................................1-5
Pre-installation...............................................................................................................................1-5
Mounting the KSU.........................................................................................................................1-6
Power Supply Removal and Replacement ...........................................................................................1-8
Power Supply Removal .................................................................................................................1-8
Power Supply Replacement...........................................................................................................1-9
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation .............................................................................................1-9
PCB Installation Considerations..................................................................................................1-10
KSU Option PCBs .......................................................................................................................1-10
PCB Option Considerations.........................................................................................................1-10
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations ..........................................................................1-10
Built-in CO Line, Digital, Telephone, and Other Circuits.................................................................1-12
Built-in CO Line Circuits ............................................................................................................1-12
Built-in Digital Telephone Circuits .............................................................................................1-12
KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring .......................................................1-12
Power Failure Telephone Installation..........................................................................................1-12
Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) Source Connection...................................1-12
External Page Output Connection ...............................................................................................1-12
QCDU2 - CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit........................................................................1-13
QCDU2 Configuration ................................................................................................................1-13
Strata DK I&M 5/00
i
Contents
Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration
QCDU2 Installation.....................................................................................................................1-13
QCDU2 Programming.................................................................................................................1-14
QSTU2A - Standard Telephone Interface Unit..................................................................................1-15
QSTU2 Configuration .................................................................................................................1-15
QSTU2 Installation......................................................................................................................1-15
QSTU2 Programming..................................................................................................................1-16
QSTU2 Wiring ............................................................................................................................1-16
QRCU3 - DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit........................................................................1-17
QRCU3 Configuration.................................................................................................................1-17
QRCU3 Installation .....................................................................................................................1-17
QRCU3 Programming .................................................................................................................1-17
Built-in Auto Attendant ...............................................................................................................1-18
Programming ...............................................................................................................................1-18
WSIU1 - Serial Interface Board.........................................................................................................1-19
WSIU1 Installation ......................................................................................................................1-19
WSIU Programming ....................................................................................................................1-19
WSIU Wiring...............................................................................................................................1-20
DK8/DK14 Compatibility..................................................................................................................1-21
DK14 Secondary Protection...............................................................................................................1-22
DK14 Wiring Diagrams .....................................................................................................................1-23
Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration
Feature Capacities ................................................................................................................................2-2
Base Key Service Unit (KSU)..............................................................................................................2-4
Station and CO Lines.....................................................................................................................2-4
Peripherals .....................................................................................................................................2-4
Expansion KSU....................................................................................................................................2-6
Peripherals .....................................................................................................................................2-8
Telephone Circuit (Port) Types............................................................................................................2-9
Digital Telephone Circuit Connections .........................................................................................2-9
Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections..................................................................................2-10
Standard Telephone Circuit Options ...........................................................................................2-10
ISDN Station Devices..................................................................................................................2-10
Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide ................................................................................2-11
Base Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check .....................................................................................2-12
Base and Expansions Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check ...........................................................2-12
Expansion Capacity .....................................................................................................................2-13
Example Configuration Tables....................................................................................................2-14
Configuration Considerations ............................................................................................................2-15
Base Cabinet ................................................................................................................................2-15
Expansion Cabinet.......................................................................................................................2-15
DK40i ISDN ................................................................................................................................2-16
Worksheet 2 System Power Factor Check ......................................................................................2-17
Telephone/Device PFs.................................................................................................................2-17
System Power Factors PCB/Telephone Device...........................................................................2-18
Worksheet Examples ...................................................................................................................2-19
PCB and Power Factor Worksheets.............................................................................................2-20
ii
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Contents
Chapter 3 DK40i Installation
Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility..................................................................................................2-21
Upgrades......................................................................................................................................2-21
DK16/DK16e/DK40/DK40i Component Compatibility .............................................................2-21
Chapter 3 DK40i Installation
Inspection .............................................................................................................................................3-1
Packaging and Storage .........................................................................................................................3-1
Site Requirements ................................................................................................................................3-1
Input Power....................................................................................................................................3-2
Clearance and Location .................................................................................................................3-2
AC Power and Grounding Requirements.............................................................................................3-4
AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test ........................................................................................3-4
Alternate or Additional Ground.....................................................................................................3-5
KSU Mounting Considerations ............................................................................................................3-5
Prior to Installation ........................................................................................................................3-5
Testing the System's Power Supply ..............................................................................................3-6
TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure.....................................................................................3-7
Mounting the Base KSU................................................................................................................3-8
Mounting the Expansion KSU.......................................................................................................3-9
Reserve Power Option........................................................................................................................3-17
Reserve Power Installation ..........................................................................................................3-18
Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option .......................................................................................3-18
Installing Power Failure Emergency Transfer.............................................................................3-18
Testing Power Failure Emergency Transfer................................................................................3-18
Power Supply Removal and Replacement .........................................................................................3-19
Power Supply Removal ...............................................................................................................3-19
Power Supply Replacement.........................................................................................................3-20
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation ...........................................................................................3-20
Base KSU PCBs ..........................................................................................................................3-20
Expansion KSU PCBs .................................................................................................................3-21
PCB Hardware/Software Options................................................................................................3-21
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations ..........................................................................3-22
PCB Wiring .................................................................................................................................3-22
Digital Telephone Circuits...........................................................................................................3-22
Configuration...............................................................................................................................3-23
K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Installation..................................................................................3-23
K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Programming..............................................................................3-23
KKYS Installation .......................................................................................................................3-24
KSTU2 Configuration .................................................................................................................3-25
KSTU2 Installation......................................................................................................................3-25
KSTU2 Wiring ............................................................................................................................3-25
KSTU2 Programming..................................................................................................................3-25
TCIU2 Installation.......................................................................................................................3-28
TCIU2 Programming...................................................................................................................3-28
TCOU Hardware Options............................................................................................................3-30
TCOU Installation or Replacement .............................................................................................3-30
TCOU Removal...........................................................................................................................3-30
TCOU Programming ...................................................................................................................3-31
TBUU and TBUS ........................................................................................................................3-31
Strata DK I&M 5/00
iii
Contents
Chapter 4 DK424 Configuration
TDDU Installation .......................................................................................................................3-33
TDDU Programming ...................................................................................................................3-33
TSIU Installation .........................................................................................................................3-36
TSIU Programming .....................................................................................................................3-36
Universal Slot PCBs...........................................................................................................................3-38
Loop Limits........................................................................................................................................3-40
DK40i Secondary Protection..............................................................................................................3-41
MDF Wiring Diagrams ......................................................................................................................3-42
Chapter 4 DK424 Configuration
System Configuration...........................................................................................................................4-1
Base Cabinet ..................................................................................................................................4-2
Expansion Cabinets .......................................................................................................................4-2
DK424 and DK280 Compatibility.................................................................................................4-3
Designated Speaker OCA, DIU Data, and T1 slots.......................................................................4-4
DK280 to DK424 Upgrades ..........................................................................................................4-5
Features Capacities...............................................................................................................................4-6
System Capacity ............................................................................................................................4-8
Printed Circuit Boards........................................................................................................................4-12
RKYS Feature Key Upgrades......................................................................................................4-16
Telephones .........................................................................................................................................4-17
Attendant Position Options ................................................................................................................4-17
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles and Door Phones (MDFBs)..............................................4-18
AC and Reserve Power Hardware......................................................................................................4-19
Floor Mount Installation Hardware....................................................................................................4-19
Worksheets.........................................................................................................................................4-20
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements..............................................................................4-21
Digital Ports Required .................................................................................................................4-21
Electronic Ports Required............................................................................................................4-21
Standard Ports Required ..............................................................................................................4-22
Station PCBs/Slots Required .......................................................................................................4-23
CO Line PCBs/Slots Required ....................................................................................................4-24
Attendant Console Slots Required...............................................................................................4-26
PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSSU Option Slots Required .....................................................................4-26
PEPU Page Option PCB Required ..............................................................................................4-26
System Slots Required.................................................................................................................4-26
Cabinets Required........................................................................................................................4-26
Worksheet 2 System Cabinet Assignment Guide ...........................................................................4-27
Worksheet 3 System PCB Assignment Guide ................................................................................4-28
Remote Cabinet Configuration Guidelines..................................................................................4-30
Worksheet 4 Option Configuration Guide ......................................................................................4-31
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check ......................................................................................4-34
Telephone/Device Power Factors................................................................................................4-36
iv
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Contents
Chapter 5 DK424 Installation
Chapter 5 DK424 Installation
Inspection .............................................................................................................................................5-1
Packaging and Storage .........................................................................................................................5-1
Site Requirements ................................................................................................................................5-2
Input Power....................................................................................................................................5-2
Clearance and Location .................................................................................................................5-2
Electrical/Environmental Requirements and Characteristics ........................................................5-4
Cable Lengths ................................................................................................................................5-5
Network Requirements ..................................................................................................................5-6
Cabinet Installation Considerations .....................................................................................................5-7
Recommended Installation Sequence...........................................................................................5-7
Power Supply Installation ....................................................................................................................5-8
Power Supply (RPSU280 or RPSU424) Removal ......................................................................5-11
Power Supply Replacement.........................................................................................................5-11
Wall Mounting ...................................................................................................................................5-11
Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) or First Remote Expansion Cabinet Installation ............................5-11
Expansion Cabinet Installation (DKSUE424).............................................................................5-12
Cabinet Floor Mounting.....................................................................................................................5-21
One or Two Cabinets...................................................................................................................5-21
Three or More Cabinets...............................................................................................................5-21
Cabinet Removal Floor-Mounted Systems...............................................................................5-28
Cabinet Replacement...................................................................................................................5-28
AC Power and Grounding Requirements...........................................................................................5-28
AC Power and Third Wire Ground Test......................................................................................5-29
Intercabinet Ground.....................................................................................................................5-30
AC Power Cabling Installation ..........................................................................................................5-30
AC Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) ....................................................................5-30
AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) ................................................................5-31
AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) ...............................................................5-31
Reserve Power Installation.................................................................................................................5-32
Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) .............................................................5-33
Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) .........................................................5-33
Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) .....................................5-34
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation ...........................................................................................5-45
PCB Installation Considerations..................................................................................................5-45
PCB Option Considerations.........................................................................................................5-45
RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F
Common Control Units ......................................................................................................................5-46
PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations ..........................................................................5-46
Maximum Line Capacities...........................................................................................................5-47
Internal Hardware Options ..........................................................................................................5-48
RCTU Installation........................................................................................................................5-51
RCTU Programming....................................................................................................................5-51
DK280 to DK424 Base Cabinet Upgrade Considerations...........................................................5-52
Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit........................................................................................................5-60
Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions ...........................................................................................5-61
Status Indicators ..........................................................................................................................5-65
Monitor Port Communication Parameters...................................................................................5-66
Monitor Port Pin Assignments ....................................................................................................5-66
Strata DK I&M 5/00
v
Contents
Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration
Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration
System Overview .................................................................................................................................6-1
Architecture..........................................................................................................................................6-2
Processor PCBs ....................................................................................................................................6-2
Processor PCB Subassemblies.......................................................................................................6-3
Cabinet Slots ........................................................................................................................................6-3
Base Cabinet ..................................................................................................................................6-3
Expansion Cabinets .......................................................................................................................6-4
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) ......................................................................................................6-4
Maximum Station/Line Capacities.......................................................................................................6-4
ISDN BRI CIrcuit Capacity Guidelines...............................................................................................6-7
Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit........................................................................................................6-16
DK424 and DK424i Hardware Compatibility ...................................................................................6-17
Functional Block Diagrams................................................................................................................6-18
Worksheet Description.......................................................................................................................6-21
Remote Cabinet Configuration Considerations .................................................................................6-21
Component Worksheets...............................................................................................................6-21
Worksheet 1: Toshiba Digital Telephones ........................................................................................6-22
Worksheet 2: Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone .............................................................................6-23
Configuring Strata DK AirLink...................................................................................................6-24
Worksheet 3: Standard Telephone ....................................................................................................6-25
Worksheet 4: CO Line ......................................................................................................................6-26
Worksheet 5: Feature Option PCB.....................................................................................................6-27
Worksheet 6: DK424i Cabinet Slot Configuration ............................................................................6-28
PCB Placement Guidelines..........................................................................................................6-28
Worksheet 7 System Power Factor Check ......................................................................................6-34
Telephone/Device Power Factors................................................................................................6-36
Cabinet Power Factor Check..............................................................................................................6-38
Worksheet 8 Cabinet AC/Reserve Power Components ..................................................................6-39
Power Considerations ..................................................................................................................6-39
Reserve Power .............................................................................................................................6-40
Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware .......................................................................................6-41
Chapter 7 DK424i Installation
Inspection .............................................................................................................................................7-1
Packaging and Storage .........................................................................................................................7-1
Site Requirements ................................................................................................................................7-2
Input Power....................................................................................................................................7-2
Clearance and Location .................................................................................................................7-2
Power Considerations...........................................................................................................................7-4
Reserve Power ...............................................................................................................................7-4
FCC Registration Information..............................................................................................................7-5
Cabinet Installation Considerations .....................................................................................................7-6
Recommended Installation Sequence...........................................................................................7-6
Step 1: Install Power Supply ..............................................................................................................7-6
Power Supply (BPSU672A) Removal...........................................................................................7-7
Power Supply Replacement...........................................................................................................7-7
Step 2: Mount Cabinets ......................................................................................................................7-9
Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet ........................................................................................7-9
vi
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Contents
Chapter 8 T1
Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets............................................................................................7-10
Step 3: Ground the System ...............................................................................................................7-17
Step 4: Install AC Power Components .............................................................................................7-19
AC Power Requirements .............................................................................................................7-19
Cabinet AC Power Component Description................................................................................7-19
AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview.........................................................................7-21
Cabinet AC Power Considerations ..............................................................................................7-22
Cabinet AC Power Component Configuration............................................................................7-22
Step 5: Install Reserve Power ..........................................................................................................7-26
Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables.............................................................................7-27
Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) .............................................................7-27
Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) .........................................................7-28
Cabinet Floor Mounting ..............................................................................................................7-30
Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) .....................................7-39
Step 6: Install Universal and Processor PCBs ..................................................................................7-39
PCB Installation Considerations..................................................................................................7-40
PCB Option Considerations.........................................................................................................7-40
BCU Processor PCBs.........................................................................................................................7-41
PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations ..........................................................................7-41
Maximum Capacities...................................................................................................................7-41
Internal Hardware Options ..........................................................................................................7-42
BCU Installation ..........................................................................................................................7-44
BCU Programming ......................................................................................................................7-45
Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit........................................................................................................7-53
Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions ....................................................................................7-54
Status Indicators ..........................................................................................................................7-58
Monitor Port Communication Parameters...................................................................................7-59
Monitor Port Pin Assignments ....................................................................................................7-59
Chapter 8 T1
Channelization......................................................................................................................................8-1
Slot Assignments..................................................................................................................................8-1
SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option)...............................................8-2
RDTU Installation .........................................................................................................................8-2
System Programming for T1 .........................................................................................................8-3
RDTU Programming .....................................................................................................................8-6
Installation Guidelines .........................................................................................................................8-8
Applications ........................................................................................................................................8-9
RDTU to Network .........................................................................................................................8-9
RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated More Than 655 ft.) ......................................................................8-10
RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated Less Than 655 ft.)........................................................................8-10
Hardware and Cabling........................................................................................................................8-11
RDTU Cable Length Switch........................................................................................................8-11
RDTU Loop Back Jumper Plugs .................................................................................................8-11
RDTU Front Panel Indicators......................................................................................................8-12
RDTU Cable Installation .............................................................................................................8-13
Strata DK I&M 5/00
vii
Contents
Chapter 9 Universal Slot PCBs
Loop Back Testing .............................................................................................................................8-14
RDTU Self Test ...........................................................................................................................8-14
Network/CSU T1 Span Test ........................................................................................................8-14
Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test .................................................................................................8-15
Performance Monitoring ....................................................................................................................8-16
T1 Fault Isolation ...............................................................................................................................8-18
Flowchart Symbols.............................................................................................................................8-19
Chapter 9 Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Compatibility ...............................................................................................................................9-1
PCB Chapter Layout ............................................................................................................................9-3
BVPU Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit.....................................................................................9-4
BVPU Configuration .....................................................................................................................9-4
BVPU Installation..........................................................................................................................9-4
BVPU Programming......................................................................................................................9-5
KCDU CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit ...........................................................................9-8
KCDU Configuration ....................................................................................................................9-8
KCDU Installation.........................................................................................................................9-8
KCDU Programming.....................................................................................................................9-8
PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit.......................................................................................9-10
PDKU2 Hardware Options..........................................................................................................9-10
PDKU2 Installation .....................................................................................................................9-10
PDKU2 Programming .................................................................................................................9-10
PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit....................................................................................9-12
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU
(Internal Option) .........................................................................................................................9-12
External Options ..........................................................................................................................9-12
PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option .......................................................9-12
PEKU Installation........................................................................................................................9-13
PEKU Programming....................................................................................................................9-13
PEPU2 External Page Interface Unit ..............................................................................................9-15
PEPU2 Installation ......................................................................................................................9-15
PEPU2 Programming ..................................................................................................................9-15
PESU Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit .....................................................................9-17
DK40i General Information.........................................................................................................9-17
Installing the Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) (Internal Option) ......................9-17
External Options ..........................................................................................................................9-18
PESU Installation ........................................................................................................................9-18
PESU Programming ....................................................................................................................9-19
PIOU2, PIOUS2 Option Interface Units.........................................................................................9-21
IMDU Compatibility with PIOU and PIOUS..............................................................................9-21
IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option) ...............................................9-21
PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation .......................................................................................................9-22
PIOU2, PIOUS2 Programming ...................................................................................................9-22
RATU Attendant Console Interface Unit........................................................................................9-26
RATU Installation .......................................................................................................................9-26
viii
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Contents
Chapter 9 Universal Slot PCBs
RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Caller ID Interface......................................................................................9-27
RCIS PCB....................................................................................................................................9-27
DK40i RCIU2 Installation...........................................................................................................9-27
DK424 and DK424i RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation ....................................................................9-27
DK424i RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation........................................................................................9-27
DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation ................................................9-28
RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Programming ..........................................................................................9-28
RCOU, RCOS Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit ....................................................9-32
RCOS Installation (Internal Option)............................................................................................9-32
RCOU Installation .......................................................................................................................9-33
RCOU Programming ...................................................................................................................9-33
RDDU Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit .........................................................................9-37
RDDU Installation.......................................................................................................................9-37
RDDU Programming...................................................................................................................9-38
RDSU Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit .........................................................................9-40
Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option) ......................................................................9-40
Installing RSTS (Internal Option) ...............................................................................................9-40
RDSU Installation........................................................................................................................9-41
RDSU Programming....................................................................................................................9-41
RDTU T1 Interface Unit .................................................................................................................9-42
REMU Tie Line Unit ......................................................................................................................9-43
REMU Installation.......................................................................................................................9-43
PEMU Installation .......................................................................................................................9-44
PEMU, REMU Programming......................................................................................................9-44
RGLU2 Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit ......................................................................9-47
RGLU2 Installation .....................................................................................................................9-47
RGLU2 Programming .................................................................................................................9-47
RSIU, RSIS, RMDS RS-232/Modem Interface Unit......................................................................9-49
RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation.........................................................................................9-50
RSIU Installation .........................................................................................................................9-50
RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming .............................................................................................9-53
RSSU PC Interface Unit..................................................................................................................9-55
RSSU Installation ........................................................................................................................9-55
RSSU Programming ....................................................................................................................9-55
RSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit ....................................................................................9-57
R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option) ..................................................................9-57
External Options ..........................................................................................................................9-58
RSTU2 Installation ......................................................................................................................9-58
RSTU2 Programming ..................................................................................................................9-59
RMCU/RCMS E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface .....................................................................9-60
RCMS Subassemblies Installation...............................................................................................9-60
RMCU Installation ......................................................................................................................9-62
RMCU/RCMS Programming ......................................................................................................9-63
Network Requirements ................................................................................................................9-64
Strata DK I&M 5/00
ix
Contents
Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths.....................................................................................................................................10-2
Station Wiring Diagrams .............................................................................................................10-4
Digital Station Wiring .................................................................................................................10-4
Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams..........................................................................................10-11
Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................................10-19
Analog Devices Wiring .............................................................................................................10-21
Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs......................................................................10-23
CO Line Wiring Diagrams ...............................................................................................................10-25
DID and Tie Line Wiring ..........................................................................................................10-31
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams ..........................................................................................10-35
Chapter 11 Station Apparatus
Types of Telephones ..........................................................................................................................11-1
Digital Telephones.......................................................................................................................11-1
Electronic Telephones .................................................................................................................11-2
Standard Telephones....................................................................................................................11-2
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset.................................................................................................11-2
Telephone Installation........................................................................................................................11-3
Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) ................................................11-4
System Connection ......................................................................................................................11-5
Telephone Wall Mounting...........................................................................................................11-6
Telephone Upgrades...........................................................................................................................11-8
Digital Telephone Upgrades........................................................................................................11-8
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone ........................................................................................11-11
Installation .................................................................................................................................11-12
Programming .............................................................................................................................11-12
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)..........................................................................11-14
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps ................................................................................................11-16
Beep Strap..................................................................................................................................11-17
Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) .......................................11-17
Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option ..................................11-17
External Power Straps ...............................................................................................................11-18
DKT2000 ADM Installation......................................................................................................11-18
Electronic Telephone Upgrades .......................................................................................................11-19
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) .................................................11-19
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)..........................................................................11-21
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps ................................................................................................11-22
Beep Strap..................................................................................................................................11-22
Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only) ............................................................11-23
Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only) .......................11-23
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection ..........................................................11-23
DDSS Console Connections......................................................................................................11-23
DDSS Console Configuration ...................................................................................................11-24
DDSS Programming ..................................................................................................................11-24
HDSS Console...........................................................................................................................11-24
Door Phone (MDFB)........................................................................................................................11-25
x
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Contents
Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation
Lock Control Unit and Door Phone .................................................................................................11-25
DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling ...........................................................................................11-26
DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting ..................................................................................................11-26
MDFB Wall Mounting ..............................................................................................................11-27
Door Phone/Lock Programming................................................................................................11-27
Cordless Digital Telephones ............................................................................................................11-28
DKT2004-CT.............................................................................................................................11-28
Precautions.................................................................................................................................11-28
DKT2104-CT.............................................................................................................................11-29
Cordless Telephone Installation (DKT2004-CT and DKT2104-CT)........................................11-30
Telephone Cord Connection......................................................................................................11-31
Connect and Apply Power to Base Unit....................................................................................11-31
Cordless Telephone Connectors ................................................................................................11-32
Handset Battery Pack Installation..............................................................................................11-32
Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack .............................................................................11-32
Tips on Extending Battery Pack Life ........................................................................................11-34
Digital Add-on Module Installation .................................................................................................11-35
ADM Programming...................................................................................................................11-36
PC Attendant Console ......................................................................................................................11-37
Hardware Installation ................................................................................................................11-37
PC Attendant Console Programming ........................................................................................11-39
PC Attendant Console Software Installation .............................................................................11-40
Backup/Restore Configuration ..................................................................................................11-50
Windows Control Panel.............................................................................................................11-51
Conventional Attendant Console .....................................................................................................11-54
Installation .................................................................................................................................11-54
Conventional Attendant Console Programming........................................................................11-54
Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation
Power Failure Options........................................................................................................................12-1
Reserve Power .............................................................................................................................12-1
DK14/DK40i Single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer....................................................12-1
DK40i/DK424 Power Failure Transfer Unit ...............................................................................12-1
Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation ............................................................12-2
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options ...........................................................12-3
MOH Option................................................................................................................................12-3
BGM Options ..............................................................................................................................12-6
Alternate BGM Source Installation .............................................................................................12-9
External BGM Installation.........................................................................................................12-10
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control ...............................................................................12-10
External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU)........................................12-10
Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU .........................................12-16
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options........................................................................................... 12-19
Loud Ringing Bell Option .........................................................................................................12-19
Amplified Speaker Option.........................................................................................................12-22
Talkback Amplified Speaker Option.........................................................................................12-24
HESB Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................12-26
External Page Options......................................................................................................................12-26
External Page Option Installation.............................................................................................. 12-26
Strata DK I&M 5/00
xi
Contents
Chapter 13 ACD Installation
Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference................................................................................12-32
DK40i Information ....................................................................................................................12-32
DK424 Information ...................................................................................................................12-32
Amplified Talk Path ..................................................................................................................12-33
Amplifier Requirements ............................................................................................................12-33
Amplifier Programming ............................................................................................................12-33
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options .............................................................................12-35
SMDR Printout Examples .........................................................................................................12-37
SMDR Programming.................................................................................................................12-38
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation .................................................................12-39
System Database Printout Using SMDR Port..................................................................................12-41
Program 97 ................................................................................................................................12-41
Voice Mail Options ..........................................................................................................................12-41
Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems ...........................................12-42
Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems .................................................................12-43
General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming .................................................12-43
Voice Mail Program Checklist ..................................................................................................12-44
Voice Mail System Installation .................................................................................................12-46
PC/Data Communications Interface Units .......................................................................................12-46
RPCI-DI Dual Mode..................................................................................................................12-47
Common DIU Connections .......................................................................................................12-47
EIA Interface Leads (Signals) ...................................................................................................12-49
DIP Switch Options ...................................................................................................................12-58
RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI to PC Installation .................................................................................12-60
PDIU-DS to Printer Installation ................................................................................................12-61
PDIU-DS to Modem Installation...............................................................................................12-62
Modem Setup Recommendations..............................................................................................12-64
PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly ......................................................................................12-64
RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests ....................................12-65
DK Alarm Sensor.............................................................................................................................12-73
Auto Attendant .................................................................................................................................12-74
Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA) ..................................................................................12-74
Non-built-in Auto Attendant .....................................................................................................12-80
Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation .....................................................................................12-81
Enhanced 911 Service (E911)..........................................................................................................12-83
E911 System Installation ...........................................................................................................12-83
E911 Programming....................................................................................................................12-83
Chapter 13 ACD Installation
Installation..........................................................................................................................................13-2
Multiple Serial Port Installation ..................................................................................................13-2
Wiring..........................................................................................................................................13-2
ACD Installation Guidelines ..............................................................................................................13-4
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations..........................................................................13-6
ACD Programming......................................................................................................................13-6
Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups...........................................................................13-6
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Incoming Line Calls ...................................................................................13-6
Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group.....................................................13-7
Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group ...........................................................................13-7
xii
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Contents
Chapter 14 Fault Finding
Overflow From an ACD Group Queue .......................................................................................13-7
ACD Group Status.......................................................................................................................13-8
Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment ......................................................................................13-9
ACD SMDR Printout Examples................................................................................................13-10
Insight DK........................................................................................................................................13-14
Call Center Viewer (CCV)...............................................................................................................13-14
Application Overview................................................................................................................13-14
Strata DK Requirements............................................................................................................13-15
Host PC Requirements...............................................................................................................13-15
Reference Information...............................................................................................................13-16
CCV Configuration ..........................................................................................................................13-16
Considerations ...........................................................................................................................13-16
Connectors .................................................................................................................................13-16
CCV Configuration Instructions ......................................................................................................13-18
Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC ..........................................................................13-18
Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC, More than 50 Feet Away ................................13-19
Connecting CCV and SMIS ......................................................................................................13-19
Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs............................................................................................13-20
Connecting the CCV to More than Three CCV PC...................................................................13-21
Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards....................................................................................................13-23
Multiple Wall Boards ................................................................................................................13-23
Chapter 14 Fault Finding
Fault Classification.............................................................................................................................14-1
Fault Clearing Procedures ..................................................................................................................14-1
Parts Return........................................................................................................................................14-2
KSU/Processor PCB Fault Isolation ..................................................................................................14-3
Fault Isolation Procedure.............................................................................................................14-3
DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test................................................................................................14-4
Station Cable Continuity Check.........................................................................................................14-7
Voltmeter Test .............................................................................................................................14-7
Ohmmeter Test ............................................................................................................................14-8
Cable Installation Test .................................................................................................................14-9
Fault Isolation Flowcharts................................................................................................................14-10
Chapter 15 Computer Telephony Integration
About Strata DK and TAPI ................................................................................................................15-1
Requirements......................................................................................................................................15-1
StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows ........................................................................15-2
Step 1: Remove Previously Installed DKT TAPI Service Provider Applications ......................15-2
Step 2: Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages.........................................................................15-3
Step 2: Initialize StrataLink and the TAPI Service Provider.......................................................15-4
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections ..............................................................................................15-6
StrataLink Operation ...................................................................................................................15-6
DDE Commands..........................................................................................................................15-9
Telephone System Events..........................................................................................................15-10
TeleMagic Link .........................................................................................................................15-14
Testing TSPI Link .....................................................................................................................15-14
CTI Application Bulletin Contents ..................................................................................................15-16
Strata DK I&M 5/00
xiii
Contents
Chapter 16 ISDN Interfaces
Chapter 16 ISDN Interfaces
PRI Overview.....................................................................................................................................16-1
BRI S/T Overview..............................................................................................................................16-1
BRI U Overview ................................................................................................................................16-2
Strata DK ISDN Reference Model ..............................................................................................16-3
System Capacity of ISDN Circuits..............................................................................................16-3
RPTU Interface Unit ..........................................................................................................................16-5
RPTU Overview ..........................................................................................................................16-5
CSU Requirements ......................................................................................................................16-5
DK40i Slot Assignments .............................................................................................................16-6
DK424 Slot Assignments ............................................................................................................16-6
DK424i Slot Assignments ...........................................................................................................16-7
RPTU Installation...............................................................................................................................16-8
Cabling.......................................................................................................................................16-11
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units..........................................................................................16-13
Overview ...................................................................................................................................16-14
Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information .....................................................................................16-15
PS-1 Backup Power Option.......................................................................................................16-15
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Installation.........................................................................................16-17
Modular Jack Pin Configurations ..............................................................................................16-22
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines ...............................................................16-22
Connecting TBSU and RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode).....................................................16-25
Connecting TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode)...........................................16-26
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations...............................................................16-28
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit .........................................................................................16-30
RBUU and TBUU Installation ..................................................................................................16-30
TBUU and RBUU/RBUS Wiring Guidelines ...........................................................................16-33
ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting .................................................................................................16-36
BRI-U, LT Interface Terminal Loop Back Test ........................................................................16-36
RPTU Loop-back Test...............................................................................................................16-38
Timing and Synchronization ............................................................................................................16-39
RPTU Performance Monitoring ................................................................................................16-41
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring.................................................................................................................16-43
BRI Call Monitor.......................................................................................................................16-46
SMDR Output for ISDN ..................................................................................................................16-48
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code .........................................................................................................16-48
Explanation of the LCD Information.........................................................................................16-49
Disconnect Cause Code Tables .................................................................................................16-51
Glossary.............................................................................................................................................. GL-1
Index.......................................................................................................................................................IN-1
xiv
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Introduction
This manual provides detailed step-by-step instructions for installing and maintaining the Strata
DK14, DK40i, DK424 and DK424i digital business telephone systems. It is intended for qualified
service technicians and system programmers.
Use this manual in conjunction with the Strata DK Programming Manual which covers the
programs related to the Strata DK systems discussed in this book.
Organization
In this manual, information specific to one system is clearly marked for that system whether in a
chapter title or within a chapter (e.g., DK40i CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (KCDU)
found in Chapter 7). Unmarked information should be considered to be general to all Strata DK
systems discussed in this book.
This manual is organized into these sections/chapters for your convenience:
Chapter 1 DK14 Installation covers site requirements and explains how to install Strata
DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU). Includes power requirements, cable lengths/network and
grounding requirements.
Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration explains how to configure a Strata DK40i system. It also
provides space to record the hardware and station devices that make up the system.
Chapter 3 DK40i Installation covers site requirements and cabinet installation information.
Defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment
for the Strata DK40i. Also included are input power requirements, cable lengths/network
requirements, and grounding requirements. Explains how to install both the Base Key Service
Unit (KSU) and the Expansion KSU. Instructions are also provided on how to remove and
replace cabinets on installed systems.
Chapter 4 DK424 Configuration explains how to configure a Strata DK424 system. It also
provides worksheets for determining hardware and station equipment placement and
requirements.
Chapter 5 DK424 Installation covers site requirements and cabinet installation. Defines
the site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the Strata
DK424. Also included are input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements, and
grounding requirements. Explains how to install both the Base and the Expansion Cabinets.
Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace cabinets on installed systems.
Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration explains how to configure a Strata DK424i system. It
also provides worksheets for determining hardware and station equipment placement and
requirements.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
xv
Introduction
Organization
Chapter 7 DK424i Installation covers site requirements and cabinet installation. Defines
the site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the Strata
DK424i. Also included are input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements,
and grounding requirements. Explains how to install the Base and the Expansion Cabinets.
Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace cabinets on installed systems.
Chapter 8 DK424 T1 provides information on T1/DS-1 interfacing for the DK40i, DK424
and DK424i.
Chapter 9 DK Universal Slot PCBs provides procedures for Strata DK40i/DK424i system
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) for installation into universal slots. It includes installation
instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming considerations
for each PCB.
Note
PCBs that cannot be installed into universal slots can be found in the installation chapter
for the system (e.g., Chapter 3 DK40i Installation).
Chapter 10 DK Universal Slot PCB Wiring contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for
connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies to the Strata DK
systems.
Note
Wiring diagrams for PCBs that cannot be installed into universal slots can be found in the
installation chapter for the system (e.g., Chapter 3 DK40i Installation).
Chapter 11 Station Apparatus provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the
Strata DK systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures
for installing direct station selection consoles, PC and conventional attendant consoles, and
door phones also appear.
Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation provides connection procedures for optional peripheral
equipment to Strata DK systems. The instructions for each option include hardware
requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming
considerations.
Chapter 13 DK424 ACD Installation includes installation instructions for Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) and Management Information System (MIS) for the Strata DK40i, DK424
(applies to all common control processors except the RCTUA) and DK424i. Includes
installation instructions for Call Center Viewer..
Chapter 14 Fault Finding for troubleshooting and fixing problems.
Chapter 15 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) contains CTI, TAPI, and System
Open Architecture Interface information. CTI application notes can be inserted here.
Chapter 16 ISDN contains an overview of the ISDN hardware with specific information on
the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). It includes
instructions for installation, hardware requirements, wiring requirements, and some
programming considerations.
Glossary/Index
xvi
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
Conventions
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within
Note
some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered
notes apply to specific items.
Important!
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data
CAUTION!
could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or
WARNING!
death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an
[DN]
extension or intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
[PDN]
number for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which
[SDN]
appears on another telephone is considered an SDN.
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional
[PhDN]
DN).
$ULDO %ROG
Represents telephone buttons.
Courier
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
"Type"
Indicates entry of a string of text.
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then
"Press"
press Enter.
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries
without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry.
Plus (+)
Example: Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a
sequential entry. Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~)
Means "through." Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.
Represents all of the DK424i processors. The DK424i processors
BCU
are: B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU/B5CBU.
B2CAU/CBU
Abbreviation for the B2CAU/B2CBU.
B3CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B3CAU/B3CBU.
B5CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B5CAU/B2CBU.
Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.
Denotes a procedure.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
xvii
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Conventions
Description
Used in a programming sequence to denote a variable LED button.
A number on the black button represents a specific LED button.
Indicates continuation of a series of numbers entered.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
See Figure 10
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI
Internet download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Related Documents/Media
Note
Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, FYI, or in
print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication
Information on the back of the document's title page.
General Descriptions
Strata DK General Description
Strata DK Call Center Solutions General Description
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description
Installation and Programming
Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual
Strata DK Programming Manual
Strata AirLink Wireless Systems Installation Guide
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) Installation Guide
Insight DK Installation Guide
Voice Over Internet Protocol Installation & Maintenance Manual
Feature Description
Strata DK Feature Description Manual
User Guides
Digital Telephone
Digital Single Line Telephone
Electronic Telephone
Standard Telephone
DKT2004-CT Cordless Telephone
DKT2104-CT Cordless Telephone
Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset
xviii
Strata DK I&M 5/00
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
PC/Data Interface
System Administrator Guide
PC Attendant Console
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS)
Call Center Viewer
Insight DK Supervisor Guide
ACD Agent Guide
ACD Supervisor Guide
Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual
Keyprint 2000
Quick Reference Guides
Digital Telephone
Electronic Telephone
Strata AirLink External Wireless
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless
PC Attendant Console
Insight DK inView
CD-ROMs
Strata DK Library
Strata DK HMIS
StrataControl
DKi Quote
DKi Admin/DKi Backup
Strata DK424 Insight DK (Insight works with the DK424i also)
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all Strata DK
documentation and enables you to view, print, and download current publications.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
xix
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
xx
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
1
DK14 Installa
tion
This chapter explains how to install the Strata DK14 system. It includes information on site
requirements, wiring diagrams, and step-by-step instructions on how to install the unit(s), the
ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (battery backup) cabling, and PCB cabling.
Inspection
1. When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If
any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and
make the proper claims.
2. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect
all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier
immediately.
3. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system
hardware.
Packaging and Storage
CAUTION!
When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back
(soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges.
When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power
supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be
packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure
to package equipment in its original shipping containers.
Site Requirements
This section defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating
environment for the DK14. Also included are grounding requirements. (Table 1-1 for electrical/
environmental characteristics.)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-1
DK14 Installation
Site Requirements
Input Power
The system requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 amps. The AC
outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third-wire ground. (See "AC
Power and Grounding Requirements" on Page 1-3 for details).
This is to eliminate interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like, and to prevent
accidental power-off. To avoid accidental power turn-off, Toshiba recommends that you do not use
an On/Off wall switch on this dedicated AC circuit.
For the DK14, a reserve power source (two customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be connected
to the system to serve as a power failure backup.
Clearance and Location
Front View
The minimum clearance requirements for the DK14
KSU are shown in Figure 1-1. The HPFB should be
2"
mounted directly above the D14 KSU.
HPFB
Consider the following conditions when selecting a
2"
location for the KSU(s):
DK14 KSU
The location must be:
Dry and clean
16.4"
Well ventilated
Well illuminated
Easily accessible
2"
2"
10"
2"
The location must not be:
Top View
Subject to extreme heat or cold
3"
Wall
Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other
airborne contaminants
Subject to excessive vibration
3' Front Clearance
Next to television, radio, office automation, or
2399
high frequency equipment
Figure 1-1
DK14 KSU Clearance
Requirements
1-2
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
Table 1-1
Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK14 Installa
DK14 Primary Power
Input AC (Power Supply Specification)
85~135VAC
AC frequency
50/60 Hz
Power
75 watts maximum
AC Current
<0.7 amps maximum
tion
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
32~104° F (0 ~40° C)
Operating humidity
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
Storage temperature
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
+24VDC (+26.3~+27.8VDC)
DC voltage output specification
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
+5VDC converter on KSU PCB
QSTU2 (Circuits 1 and 2)
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Ring Voltage
Low position 130 ± 20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability
2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
QSTU2 modem interface data rate
14,400 bps maximum
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
The DK14 requires a solid earth ground
Ground 1
Third Wire Ground
for proper operation. The AC power cord
To AC Power Cord
contains a conductor for the "third-wire
Third Wire
ground" provided by the commercial
AC Ground
DK14 KSU
power outlet.
Power
The third-wire ground should be the only
Supply
ground necessary for the DK14; this
4' 5"
ground must originate at the buildings
A
main power distribution panel and have a
solid connection to earth ground. (See
AC Voltage
Electrical Building
115VAC
Figure 1-2.)
Ground (Main Power
± 10VAC
Distribution Box)
AC Voltage Range:
AC Current
FG
0.7 amps max.
115VAC ± 10VAC
2159
0.7 amp. max
Alternate Ground
Grounding Rod
Figure 1-2
DK14 Grounding Diagram
CAUTION!
Lack of proper ground may cause improper operation and, in extreme cases,
system failure.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-3
DK14 Installation
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test
Test the "third-wire ground" for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third
prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a
commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the
following earth ground test procedure.
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the
following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage.
To perform the earth ground test procedure
1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC.
2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires)
on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground). Either the same
reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained.
4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe
to the second voltage terminal.
CAUTION!
If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to
green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit
Steps 5 and 6, and see following CAUTION!
5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a reading of 105~125VAC on the other terminal
is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet.
6. Set the meter to the "OHMS/Rx1" scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other
probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than 1
ohm.
CAUTION!
If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded.
If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly
grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National
Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected.
Alternate or Additional Ground
If the "third-wire" AC ground can not practically be improved or if extreme motor noise or other
disturbance causes system malfunction, or if local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct
ground may be warranted.
Connect a separate earth ground from a cold water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the FG
screw terminal on the DK14 power supply (see Figure 1-2).
This chapter provides the instructions necessary to mount the DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU).
Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace the power supply.
1-4
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
KSU Mounting Considerations
DK14 Installa
The KSU is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. Toshiba recommends using
the following method.
ti
Pre-installation
10"
on
1. Loosen the screws on the front cover of the
6.87
KSU, and remove the cover (Figure 1-3).
Front Cover
2. Move the SW1 RAM Storage Battery jumper
Screws (4)
plug strap on the motherboard to the On
position (Figure 1-4).
AC
DC
3. If the DK14 is less than one mile from the
central office (or PBX), set the CO line PAD
16.3
switches, SW401 and SW451, to the PAD
position to provide a 3db level loss to avoid
excessive loudness.
4. Install all optional PCBs per instructions later
in this chapter.
Wall Mount
2361
Screws (4)
6.7
Figure 1-3
DK14 Dimensions
WMAU1A
J21
FG
J19
WSIU
SW1
J20
WSIU
Off
J16
QRCU
DK14 Main Printed
On
Circuit Board
J11 J14
QSTU
QSTU
System Frame
Ground Bar
J10
C02
J3, CO Line 2
J15
QRCU
Modular Jack (RJ11)
25-pair Female
QCDU#2
J3
Amphenol Connector
(to Station Tip/Ring
J2, CO Line1
C01
Modular Jack (RJ11)
and Relay Contact)
0 PAD 3
SW451
NOR BNPAD
J2
SW451 (CO1)
SW401 (CO2):
J9
3-db PAD
0 PAD 3
SW401
Switches for
J13
J12
NOR BNPAD
QSTU
QSTU
CO Line 1 and 2
QCDU#1
VR701
J7
J8
FG BAR
2404
Modular Jack Cover Holders
(for Storage of Modular Jack Covers)
Figure 1-4
DK14 Interior View
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-5
DK14 Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Mounting the KSU
1. Make sure the power supply switch is turned Off.
2. Place the KSU on the desired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of the
four screw holes (there is one on each corner). See Figures 1-3 and 1-5.
3. Make sure the location of the KSU meets the minimum clearance requirements.
4. Drill holes on these marks.
5. Secure screws approximately two thirds
Stud
of the way into the top two holes on the
Plasterboard
Hard Board
(1/4 inch plywood)
mounting surface.
6. Hang the unit from the top two screws
and then secure the screws completely
into the mounting surface.
7. Finish securing the unit to the mounting
surface by completely screwing the
bottom two screws into the wall.
8. Ground system according to previous
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
instructions on Page 1-3.
9. Connect applicable wiring (modular CO
2360
line cords, 25-pair amphenol connector
cable, etc.) to the KSU. Route the wiring
DK14 KSU
as shown in Figure 1-6, and then fasten
wiring to the unit with the tie wraps that
come with the KSU. (See Figures
Figure 1-5
DK14 KSU Wall Mount Method
1-16~1-17 for additional wiring details.)
Note
Figure 1-6 shows cables routed to
the right; they may also be routed to
the left, depending on the location of
the MDF.
10. If the Reserve Power Battery and Charger (HPFB) is going to be installed, refer to the
following section. If not, proceed to Step 11.
11. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn On the DC power supply switch.
12. Reinstall the front cover onto the KSU.
1-6
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
DK14 Installa
3"
Tie-wrap Holder
To HPFB FG
Reserve
Screw
Battery (HPFB)
BATT
Connector
ti
AC Power Cord
--
on
DC
DC ON/OFF
O
and Plug 4' 7"
Power Switch
SI02
RS-232
SI01
Interface
Jacks, TTY,
Station
Caller ID,
Tip/Ring
CO4
SMDR
Amphenol
25-pair Jack
CO2
RJ11 CO
(female)
Line Jacks
CO1
CO3
PFT
RJ11 Power
Tie-wrap supplied
Failure
to Hold Amphenol
Transfer Jack
Connector
Tie-wrap
Holder
2397
Left Side View
Right Side View
Figure 1-6
DK14 Side View and Jack Locations
Reserve Power Battery
A second HPFB can be installed directly above the unit to supply backup reserve power.
To install the Reserve Power Battery and Charger (HPFB)
1. Place the HPFB directly above the DK14 KSU (Figure 1-7).
2. Mark the location of the two screw holes, then drill holes.
3. Screw the two screws two-thirds into the mounting surface.
4. Hang the HFPU on the screws then tighten the screws into the mounting surface.
5. Plug the first HPFB connector into BATT connector on the right side of the KSU.
6. Connect a ground wire from the HPFB "FG" screw to the DK14 QPSU8 screw labeled
"HPFB6." The ground wire can be fed through the opening by the AC power cord.
Note
The DK14 should be plugged into AC power and the DC power switch should be turned
On. The HFPU will not start to operate if AC power is not available during the initial
installation.
7. The 24VDC LED on the HPFB should light. If it does not light, press the battery Off switch
with a pencil point or other small-tipped object.
8. Dress and tie-wrap the HPFB cables.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-7
DK14 Installation
Power Supply Removal and Replacement
9. To mount a second HPFB, repeat Steps 1~4, then plug the second HPFB connector in the first
HPFB and connect an FG wire between each HPFB FG screw.
10. To test the HPFB, remove the DK14 AC plug from the AC outlet. The DK14 AC LED will go
out, but the DK14 DC LED remains on. Also the system remains in normal working order and
the HPFB 24V LED remains on.
11. If it is desired to turn off the HPFB (after loss of AC power), use a pencil or other sharp object
to press the Battery Off switch.
CAUTION!
Once the HPFB is turned Off or unplugged (during AC power loss) it will not
operate again until AC power is restored to the DK14 KSU.
To Second HPFB (optional)
Second HPFB
Connector
FG Screw
HPFB Unit:
Reserve Power Battery
and Charger (optional)
Tie-wrap
Tie-wrap
HPFB FG Wire
AC Power
Battery Connector
Cord/Plug 4' 7"
AC
DC Power Switch
DC
Note
Do not run power cables with
station and CO line cables.
2403
Figure 1-7
DK14 Reserve Power Installation
Power Supply Removal and Replacement
The power supply comes factory-installed in the KSU; if necessary, it can be removed and
replaced.
Power Supply Removal
1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off and that the AC power cable is not plugged into
an outlet. Confirm that green AC LED is not lit. See Figure 1-8.
2. Loosen the screws on the front cover of the KSU, and remove the cover.
3. Unplug HPFB cable from BATT connector of power supply and disconnect the HPFB ground
wire.
4. Unplug the AC cable from the CN1 connector on the power supply.
1-8
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
5. Remove the FG screw, and disconnect the green third wire ground ring terminal.
DK14 Installa
6. Unplug the DC cable from the CN3 connector on the power supply.
7. Remove the top two, and bottom left corner screws that attach the power supply to the KSU.
Remove power supply.
tion
Power Supply
QPSU8 Power Supply
Mounting Screw
CN3, Battery
Power Supply
Connector Plug
Mounting Screw
F.G. Screw for Third Wire
HPFB6
Ground Connection to
Power Supply
Battery Connector for HPFB
CN3
To HPFB6
HPFB
WARNING
FG Screw
Ground
DC Power On/Off Switch
Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.
Wire
AC
AC and DC
CN2
DC
Power Indicator LEDs
CN1
ACN1
Power Cord Connector
FG
J19
F201, 3 Amp Fuse
Yellow
Non-replacable
Wires (+24V)
Power Supply
CN2, J19
Mounting Screw
Power Supply
Connectors and Cable
2401
Figure 1-8
DK14 Power Supply
Power Supply Replacement
1. Set the power supply in its proper place in the KSU. See Figure 1-8.
2. Secure the power supply to the KSU with the top two, and bottom left corner screws.
3. Install the green third wire ground ring terminal with the FG screw.
4. Plug the AC cable into the CN1 connector on the power supply.
5. Plug the DC cable into the CN3 connector on the power supply.
6. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and turn On the power supply switch.
7. Test QPSU8 power supply according to Chapter 12-Fault Finding, "DK14 Hardware Fault
Isolation procedure."
8. Plug HPFB cable into BATT connector of power supply and reconnect the HPFB ground wire.
9. Reinstall the cover on the KSU.
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
This section provides procedures for installation of Strata DK14 system optional printed circuit
boards (PCBs) into the KSU. This includes installation instructions, optional configuration
information, and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB.
Be sure the ground has been checked. (See "AC Power and Grounding Requirements" on Page
1-3.)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-9
DK14 Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
PCB Installation Considerations
The Strata DK14 KSU comes standard with four digital telephone circuits (ports) and two CO line
circuits. These circuits, along with the common control unit, are built into the motherboard.
KSU Option PCBs
The DK14 KSU can support up to four optional PCBs, including:
A maximum of two QCDU2s: each one provides one CO line circuit and two digital telephone
circuits.
A QSTU2 which provides two standard telephone circuits (ports).
A QRCU2 which provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones (required for DISA and
devices connected to QSTU2s), and three circuits to detect busy tone (required for the ABR
feature).
A WSIU which provides a port for either a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device
or a maintenance terminal or modem, or Caller ID interface.
The KSU does not come from the factory with any option PCBs installed. Each of the option
PCBs must be installed in specific locations. (See Figure 1-9.)
PCB Option Considerations
PCBs may be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are
defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to
connection of peripheral equipment such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Hardware and
software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this
chapter.
PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior
to installation of the PCB. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in
the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Configuration instructions for external
hardware options are provided in Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation.
PCB Software Options. After installation of the PCBs in the KSU, configure the PCBs for
software options through programming. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the
individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Strata DK Programming
Manual for detailed instructions.
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations
Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is recommended that the power supply be Off.
1-10
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
DK14 Installa
HPFB6
1 or 2
tion
BATT
HPFB reserve
power units
WARNING
AC
DC
Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.
DC
J4
SIO 2
J21
6-wire RJ11
Modular Jack
J2
J3
J20
SIO 1
WSIU1A
QRCU3A
Component Side
0 PAD 3
SW101
F.G.
J1
J4
J11
J14
STU
STU
CO4
J1
J7
J5
J6
J8
J10
QCDU2A
CO2
J1
6-wire RJ11
J15
QSTS1A
QSTS2A
Modular Jacks
QKYS
J6-25 Pair
CO1
Amphenol Jack
0 PAD 3
SW101
F.G.
(female) for
QSTU2A
CO3
Telephone
Tip/Ring and
190 130
J1
J9
PFT, RJ11
Relay Contact
SW1
QCDU2A
Modular
J13
J12
Jack
J3
J2
STU
STU
System
VR701
Frame
J22
Ground
Bar
2364
MOH
600
MOH
Not
Jack
ohm
Volume
Used
Page
Control
Figure 1-9
DK14 PCB Installation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-11
DK14 Installation
Built-in CO Line, Digital, Telephone, and Other Circuits
Built-in CO Line, Digital, Telephone, and Other Circuits
The KSU comes standard with two CO lines and four digital telephone circuits already installed on
the motherboard (WMAU). See Figure 1-4 for an illustration of the WMAU.
Built-in CO Line Circuits
The two standard loop start CO line circuits are integrated into the KSU motherboard WMAU and
are identical to the QCDU2 CO line circuits.
CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross-connected to the TC-1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID
interface box (See Page 1-19 for address). See Figure 1-17 for wiring.
Built-in Digital Telephone Circuits
The four digital telephone circuits that come standard with the system are integrated into the
motherboard in the KSU. These circuits are identical to the digital circuits found on the QCDU2.
The motherboard does not have to be configured for the digital circuits to operate.
KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring
See Figures 1-14~1-16 for details.
Power Failure Telephone Installation
1. Remove the RJ11 cover (Figure 1-11) from the PFT jack and store the jack cover.
2. Connect the power failure telephone (500/2500-type standard telephone to the PFT jack.
Figure 1-16 shows the DK14 MDF to CO Line Wiring.
Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) Source Connection
Connect the MOH/BGM source to the MOH RCA jack (Figures 1-9 and 1-16) in accordance with
Music Source Configuration A in Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation.
External Page Output Connection
Connect the external page system to the 600ohm PAGE RCA output jack (Figure 1-9) to an
external amplifier in accordance with the External Page Installation guidelines in Chapter 12
Peripheral Installation.
1-12
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
QCDU2 - CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit
QCDU2 - CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit
DK14 Installa
Circuits per PCB: one loop start CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
digital telephones
PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s/RPCI-DI
ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIU-DSs
ti
Does not support a DDSS console or DDCB
on
Older Version(s):
QCDU1A
QCDU2 Configuration
The QCDU2 may have to be configured to control excessive loudness if the system is close to a
CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system. It does not have to be configured for anything
else. The decibel (db) PAD switch, SW101 controls the loudness by providing a 3 db signal level
drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position. The switch comes from the factory
set at 0 (for no PAD) meaning no PAD loss.
QCDU2 Installation
A maximum of two QCDU2 PCBs can be installed in the KSU.
To install the QCDU2
1. If the system is located within one mile of the CO or PBX telephone system, set db PAD
switch SW101 to the PAD position.
2. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off.
3. Slide QCDU2's front edge and FG wire under the System Frame Ground Bar; align and insert
the QCDU2 connector J1 into the motherboard connector (J9 for CO3 first, J10 for CO4
second). (See Figure 1-10)
Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of the connectors. Make sure the
QCDU2A
QCDU2's connector edge next to the connector
J2
CO 3/4
J1 snaps firmly into the standoffs on the KSU
FG
motherboard. (See Figure 1-4).
To System
Frame
4. Connect the Frame Ground (FG) lead from the
Ground Bar
QCDU2 to the screw nearest the QCDU2
located on the system Frame Ground bar.
SW101
Remove the "knock-out" from the KSU cover
0 PAD 3
CO3 or CO4 access slot, and store the "knock-
out" in the slots provided in the KSU base. (See
Figure 1-11.)
J1
2391
Figure 1-10 QCDU2 Printed Circuit
Board
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-13
DK14 Installation
QCDU2 - CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit
1
Side View
Knock out PFT jack
cover when QCDU,
SMDR/TTY is
C02
Cover
installed
C01
Front View
Modular
PFT
Jacks
2
Take out jack cover
when PFT is connected
3
Store the jack cover in the
jack cover holder
4
Reinstall the jack cover when the
PFT telephone is unplugged
2392
Figure 1-11 Modular Jack Cover
QCDU2 Programming
The following parameters may be specified through programming for the QCDU2.
Program 10-1: Allows/denies two-CO Line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Program 15: Auto Release detection; DISA, and other attributes to the CO line.
Program 16: Assigns CO line to groups 81~84, and dial 9 group.
Program 40: Assigns stations access to CO line (incoming and outgoing access).
Program *50: Assigns Caller ID CO lines to Caller ID interface CO line.
Program *51: Assigns station to Caller ID, Lost Call memory.
1-14
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
QSTU2A - Standard Telephone Interface Unit
QSTU2A - Standard Telephone Interface Unit
DK14 Installa
Circuits per PCB: two standard telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
standard telephones
Auto Attendant devices
separate BGM source connection
ti
voice mail machines
on
facsimile machines
Older Version(s):
QSTU1A
Note
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by
standard telephones (or any other device connected to a QSTU2 port), a QRCU3 must be
installed.
The QSTS2 PCB is factory-installed on the QSTU.
QSTU2 Configuration
The QSTU2 does not require configurations for the ring generator voltage level. Most standard
telephones and two-wire devices require 190; however, some devices may experience ring-trip at
190, and should be set at 130.
QSTU2 Installation
1. Make sure the power supply switch is Off.
2. Align the QSTU2 connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 to the motherboard connectors J11, J12, J13,
and J14 respectively. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors (see
Figure 1-12).
J1
J4
QSTS2
(factory installed)
J5
J6
QSTU2
190
130
SW1
QSTU2A J3
J2
2393
Figure 1-12 QSTU2/QSTS2 Printed Circuit Boards
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-15
DK14 Installation
QSTU2A - Standard Telephone Interface Unit
QSTU2 Programming
The following parameters can be specified for the QSTU2:
Program 31: Used to configure all QSTU2 ports connected to voice mail (see Chapter 9
Universal Slot PCBs for voice mail installation).
Program 10-2: Used to set standard telephone ringing option and separate BGM assignment.
Note
QSTU2 ports are fixed. They are assigned even if a QSTU2 is not installed.
QSTU2 Wiring
Refer to DK14 MDF to KSU Amphenol Wiring in Figure 1-16 for QSTU2 wiring.
The QSTU2 must be connected to a OL13A (or equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations.
(300 ohms loop resistance max., including the telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance.)
1-16
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
QRCU3 - DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit
QRCU3 - DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit
DK14 Installa
System:
DK14
Circuits per PCB: 3 DTMF/ABR Tone Receivers
Interfaces with:
two-wire devices such as standard telephones
Auto Attendant devices, separate BGM source connection
tion
voice mail machines
Facsimile machines.
Older Version(s):
QRCU1/QRCU2
The QRCU3 must be installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated
by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit (QSTU2),
and it is required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls. The QRCU3 circuits are also
used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) feature and must be installed to
allow ABR to operate.
QRCU3 Configuration
The QRCU3 does not have to be configured for operation.
QRCU3 Installation
1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off.
2. Align and insert the QRCU3 connectors J1 and J2 (see Figure 1-13 into the motherboard
connectors J15 and J16 respectively (note the component side placement in Figure 1-4). Apply
firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Push down until the connectors
lock together.
QRCU3A
V.1
J1
J2
QKYS
Connector
2394
Figure 1-13 QRCU3 Printed Circuit Board
QRCU3 Programming
The following parameters can be specified:
Program 12: Set QRCU3 release time.
Program 15: Sets QRCU3 operation after CO line flash.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-17
DK14 Installation
QRCU3 - DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit
Built-in Auto Attendant
DK14 Built-in Auto Attendant software is enabled by installing a QKYS1 Key (chip) onto the
QRCU3 PCB.
To install the QKYS1 Key
1. Make sure that the DKSU14 power supply switch is Off.
2. Install the QKYS1 into the QKYS1 connector on the QRCU2 PCB (see Figure 1-13).
3. The QKYS1 does not require Program 03 assignments.
Programming
Refer to "Auto Attendant (Built-in)" in the Overview section of the Strata DK Programming
Manual.
1-18
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
WSIU1 - Serial Interface Board
WSIU1 - Serial Interface Board
DK14 Installa
System:
DK14
Circuits per PCB: two serial interface ports
Interfaces with:
SMDR connection for call accounting device
Caller ID Interface Box, Interface for local connection of DKi Admin PC
tion
customer-provided external modem for remote maintenance from a PC with
DKi Admin
Older Version(s):
none
The WSIU1 PCB enables the DK14 system to connect to various hardware devices. It does not
have an internal modem and does not support IMDU or RMDS.
Only one WSIU1 can be installed per DK14 system. When installed, the WSIU1 port functions are
identified and enabled automatically when power is turned on. See Program 76-1 for initialized
data.
CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross-connected to the TC-1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID
interface box. See Figure 1-17 for wiring.
The TC-1041 (MLX-41) is available from TCI, Inc., P.O. Box 4087, Huntsville, AL 35815-4087.
Phone (256) 881-4000.
The communication parameters for TTY and Caller ID (WSIU1 SI01 or SI02) ports are:
Data word bits = 7
Parity = even
Stop bits = 1
The communication parameters for SMDR (WSIU SI01 or SI02) are:
Data word bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bit = 1
WSIU1 Installation
1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off. See Figure 1-14.
2. Slide the front edge under the System Frame Ground Bar. Align and insert WSIU connector J4
into the motherboard connector J21, and J3 into J20. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure
proper making of the connectors. Make sure the edge of the WSIU is next to the connector J1
and J2.
3. Remove the "knock-out" from the KSU cover SI01 or SI02 access slot, and store the "knock-
out" in the slots provided in the KSU base. (See Figure 1-11.)
WSIU Programming
Program 03: No assignment is necessary. WSIU1 is automatically enabled when installed and
power is turned On. It is not assigned to a slot.
Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed WSIU1 port to a function. Where X identifies the
WSIU1 port number (1~2) and Y identifies the WSIU1 port function:
Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 Off)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-19
DK14 Installation
WSIU1 - Serial Interface Board
Y=2, SMDR
Y=4, SMDI
Y=6, Caller ID Interface
Y=0, No function - this should be used for any WSIU1 ports that are not used.
Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed WSIU1 port to operate at a specified transmission rate.
Where X identifies the WSIU1 Port number (1, 2). Z identifies the WSIU1/port transmission rate
in bits-per-second (bps):
Z=1; 9600
Z=2; 4800
Z=3; 2400
Z=4; 1200
Note
The sum of WSIU1 port 1 and port 2 bps rate cannot exceed 9600 bps.
WSIU Wiring
Note
Refer to Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation, SMDR and TTY for WSIU wiring/
interconnecting details. See Figure 1-17 for Caller ID interface box to WSIU wiring.
1-20
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
DK8/DK14 Compatibility
DK8/DK14 Compatibility
DK14 Installa
Generally, Strata DK components are upward compatible to make upgrading cost-effective.
Furthermore, there is a lot of cross-compatibility between similar systems. Most of the PCBs that
were introduced for the DK14 can also be used in the DK8 system (see Table 1-2). Also, a number
of DK8 PCBs can be used in the DK14 (see Table 1-3).
tion
Table 1-2
DK14 PCBs Compatible with the DK8 System
Compatibility
DK14 PCBs
Standard
Optional
Function
(Use in DK8)
DKSU14A
-
X
Base Unit
Common Control/2-Loop Start CO Lines and 4-
QMAU2A
No
X
Digital Telephones Interface Unit
QPSU8A2
Yes
X
Power Supply
1-Loop Start CO Line and 2-Digital Telephones
QCDU2A
Yes
X
Interface Unit
QRCU3A
Yes
X
3-DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver Unit
QSTU2A
Yes
X
2-Standard Telephones Interface Unit
WSIU1A
No
X
2-Serial I/O Interface Unit
QKYS1A
Yes
X
Auto Attendant Feature Key
Table 1-3
DK8 PCBs Compatible with the DK14 System
Compatibility
DK8 PCBs
Standard
Optional
Function
(Use in DK14)
DKSU8A
-
X
Base Unit
Common Control/2-Loop Start CO Lines and 4-
QMAU1A
No
X
Digital Telephones Interface Unit
QCNU1A
No
X
Conference IC Unit
QPSU8A
Yes
X
Power Supply
1-Loop Start CO Line and 2-Digital Telephones
QCDU1A
No
X
Interface Unit
QRCU2A/1A
No
X
3-DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver Unit
QSTU1A
No
X
2-Standard Telephones Interface Unit
QSMU1A
No
X
1-SMDR/TTY Interface Unit
QKYS1A
Yes
X
Auto Attendant Feature Key
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-21
DK14 Installation
DK14 Secondary Protection
DK14 Secondary Protection
The following diagram (see Figure 1-14) shows where secondary protectors must be installed for
outside wiring.
Building #1
Building #2
QSTU2
;
;
;;;;
;
;
;;;;;
;
Standard
Telephone
or Other
HESB
Device
(optional)
;
;
;
DK14 KSU
Digital
Base Unit
Telephone
and
or Cordless
QCDU2
Base
;
;
;
MDFB
;
;
;
DDCB
Secondary protectors
;
;
;
;;;;;
DK14 KSU
Earth Ground
Base Unit
and
CO Line
QCDU2
;
;
2422
Earth Ground
;
;
;;;;
Important!
To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors
must be installed if there is outside wiring. These protectors, which contain fast
semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for
secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL497A.
Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth
ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from
ONEAC® Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the
secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of thee manufacturer.
Figure 1-14 DK14 Secondary Protector Diagram
1-22
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
DK14 Wiring Diagrams
DK14 Wiring Diagrams
DK14 Installa
Wiring diagrams for the DK14 (listed below) are shown in Figures 1-16~1-17.
DK14 MDF to Station Wiring (QCDU2 and QSTU2)
DK14 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (KSU and QCDU)
tion
DK14 MDF Wiring to Caller ID Interface (WSIU)
To Base Unit (P5) With
Station Cabling
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
Female Connector
Bridging Clips
24AWG (1 or 2 Pair, See Note 2)
W-BL
26
(-) T1 (Voice /Data)3
1
1
BL-W
1
(GND) R1 (Voice /Data)
2
2
W-O
27
(-) PT1 (Add. Power)
3
3
O-W
2
(GND) PR1 (Add. Power)
4
4
W-GN
28
T2
5
5
GN-W
3
R2
6
6
Circuit 2 to DKT23
R
GN
W-BR
29
PT2
7
7
or PDIU-DS or DDCB
BR-W
4
PR2
R1
T1
8
8
W-S
30
T3
BK
Y
9
9
S-W
5
R3
PT1
PR1
10
10
Circuit 3 to DKT33
R-BL
31
PT3
11
11
or PDIU-DS or DDCB
W
BL
BL-R
6
PR3
12
12
RJ11
R-O
32
T4
13
13
O-R
7
R4
6 5 4 3 2 1
14
14
Circuit 4 to DKT43
R-GN
33
PT4
15
15
or PDIU-DS
GN-R
8
PR4
2 3 4 5
16
16
R-BR
34
T5
17
17
PR TR PT
GND
(-)
GND
(-)
BR-R
9
R5
18
18
Circuit 5 to DKT54
PR
T
R
PT
R-S
35
PT5
Modular
19
19
or PDIU-DS
Cord
S-R
10
PR5
20
20
BK-BL
36
T6
21
21
BL-BK
11
R6
22
22
BK-O
37
Circuit 6 to DKT64
PT6
Digital Telephone (DKT 1)
23
23
or PDIU-DS
(with or without ADM,
O-BK
12
PR6
24
24
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)
BK-GN
38
T7
25
25
GN-BK
13
R7
26
26
QCDU2
BK-BR
39
PT7
Circuit 7 to DKT74
27
27
2405
BR-BK
14
or PDIU-DS
PR7
28
28
BK-S
40
T8
29
29
S-BK
15
R8
25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR
30
30
Y-BL
41
PT8
Circuit 8 to DKT84
31
31
BL-Y
16
or PDIU-DS
PR8
32
32
Notes
Y-O
42
33
33
O-Y
17
Relay Contacts
1. Voltage levels:
34
34
Y-GN
43
35
35
T, PT=-26.3~27.8 VDC
GN-Y
Not Used
18
36
36
R PR=+4.5~+5.5 VDC
Y-BR
44
R1
37
37
Standard Telephone
+5V converter on KSU PCB
BR-Y
19
T1
38
38
Circuit 1
Y-S
45
2. T/R wires are always required: PT/
39
39
S-Y
20
Not Used
QSTU2
PR are additional power wires
40
40
V-BL
46
R1
required for long station runs only.
41
41
Standard Telephone
BL-V
21
T1
42
42
Circuit 2 or BGM
PT/PR can also be used with normal
V-O
47
43
43
station runs.
O-V
22
44
44
3. DKT circuits (1~4) are standard on
V-GN
48
45
45
the DK14 main PCB.
GN-V
23
46
46
V-BR
49
4. DKT circuits (5~6) require one
47
47
BR-V
24
Not Used
optional QCDU2 circuit and DKT
48
48
V-S
50
49
49
circuits (7~8) require a second
S-V
25
50
50
QCDU2 to be installed.
66M150 Split Block
Figure 1-15 DK14 MDF to Station Wiring (QCDU2 and QSTU2)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-23
DK14 Installation
DK14 Wiring Diagrams
RJ11 Modular Jacks
To Network
Bridging Clips
T1
T1
T1
Modular Cords
1
1
R1
R1
CO1
2
2
T2
T2
GN
Y
BL
3
3
R2
R2
4
4
CO4
T3
T3
2345
5
5
R3
R3
654321
6
6
R
BK
W
R
4
T4
T4
7
7
3
R4
R4
T
8
8
R1
6-1
9
9
T2
10
10
CO2
CO3
11
11
GN
Y
BL
12
12
R
4
13
13
3
14
14
2345
T
654321
6-1
15
15
R
BK
W
16
16
17
17
R2
CO2
18
18
19
19
T3
R
4
20
20
CO3
3
T
21
21
GN
Y
BL
6-1
22
22
23
23
2345
24
24
654321
R
BK
W
CO1
25
25
26
26
R3
R
27
27
4
3
28
28
T4
T
6-1
29
29
CO4
30
30
GN
Y
BL
31
31
32
32
2345
33
33
654321
R
BK
34
34
W
35
35
R
4
R4
36
36
3
T
37
37
6-1
38
38
Notes
PFT
39
39
(bottom)
40
40
PFT, CO1, and CO2 modular
41
41
jacks are equipped on the
42
42
main circuit card of the
43
43
DK14.
44
44
CO3 requires one optional
45
45
QCDU2 and CO4 requires a
46
46
second QCDU2 to be
47
47
Power Failure
installed.
48
48
Standard Telephone
49
49
Network Jack: RJ11 or
50
50
RJ21X, FIC: 02LS2.
2406
66M150 Split Block
Figure 1-16 DK14 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (KSU and QCDU)
1-24
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK14 Installation
DK14 Wiring Diagrams
DK14 Installa
Telco RJ21X
To Network
DK14 KSU
Bridging Clips
Dealer Supplied RJ14C
RJ11 Modular
T1
T1
1
1
Jacks
R1
R1
T1
Modular Cords
2
2
CO1
T2
T2
3
3
R2
R2
GN
Y
BL
4
4
T3
ti
5
5
CO4
on
R3
R
GN
2345
6
6
654321
T4
R1
T1
R
BK
W
R
7
7
4
QCDU2
R4
BK
Y
T2
8
8
3
T
R2
9
9
R1
6-1
W
BL
10
10
T2
11
11
CO2
CO3
12
12
6 5 4 3 2 1
GN
Y
BL
13
13
R
2 3 4 5
4
QCDU2
14
14
3
15
15
2345
T
654321
6-1
16
16
R
BK
W
Modular
17
17
Cord
18
18
R2
CO2
19
19
20
20
R
4
21
21
CO3
3
T
22
22
6-1
23
23
Same connections
24
24
as above.
2345
25
25
CO1
26
26
27
27
R
28
28
4
Base
3
29
29
T
6-1
30
30
CO4
31
31
32
32
Same connections
33
33
as above.
2345
34
34
35
35
36
36
R
4
37
37
3
T
38
38
6-1
39
39
PFT
40
40
Tel Control, Inc.
(bottom)
41
41
Interface Box, TC-1041
42
42
Power Failure
Standard
43
43
MLX-41
Telephone
44
44
45
45
8 OFF
See TC-1041
OFF
Installation
46
46
7
6
Manual.
OFF
SW1
47
47
654321
SW1 5 ON
bps
1
2
48
48
4 ON
1200
OFF
OFF
Input
3 OFF
49
49
Port
2
2400
ON
OFF
50
50
3-4
1
4800
OFF
ON
66M150 Split Block
9600
ON
ON
WSIU PCB
3-pair Modular Cord
RS-232
Front View
Front View
SIO #1
Out
DB-9 Plug
6-pin Modular
or SIO #2
(male)
Jack
(per Program 76)
DB-9 (male) Modular Adaptor
(see wiring diagram)
6
6
1 2 3 4 5
5
54321
4
Input
Toshiba Part #: PPTC-CLID14
3
Port
Use Program *50 to
2
1-2
6 7 8 9
1
assign CO lines 1~4 to
MLX-41 lines 1~4
2
-
5
respectively.
5
-
1
RS-232
(Not Used)
AC Adaptor (supplied with MLX-41)
In
7
-
4
To
115VAC
3-2
±10VAC
Modular Adaptor Wiring Diagram
2430
Figure 1-17 DK14 MDF Wiring to Caller ID Interface (WSIU)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
1-25
DK14 Installation
DK14 Wiring Diagrams
1-26
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
2
DK40i Conf
iguration
This chapter explains how to configure a Strata DK40i, R4.3 system. It also provides tables for
recording the hardware and station devices that make up the system.
The DK40i Base and Expansion cabinets provide an extensive number of features for a telephone
system of its size. A list of the DK40i features and capacities is provided in Tables 2-2~2-3.
Important!
System configuration can be complex and time consuming. For best results:
Use DKi Quote, version 4.3.1 to provide easy, fast automated configuration of
DK40i without the T1, PRI and ACD features. See the DKi Quote User Guide for
more information.
If the above software is not available, use the Worksheets in this chapter.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-1
DK40i Configuration
Feature Capacities
Feature Capacities
The DK40i line, system feature and station capacities are shown in Tables 2-2~2-3.
Table 2-1
DK40i System Feature Capacities
Features
Capacity
Amplified Conferencing1
2
Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous calls in dialing queue
5
Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Numbers - stored per station
10~100
Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Numbers - stored per system
200
CO Line Groups
8
Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups
10
DH Groups
16
DH stations per Group
28
DNIS Network Routing Numbers
100
DNIS Numbers
200
DTMF receivers
5
External Page Zones
4
Call Park Orbits - general
20
Call Park Orbits - individual
28
Personal LCD Messages per DKT2
10
Personal Message DKTs
16
[PhDNs] per System
28
[PDNs] per System
28
Ring Tones
3
Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party)
3
Simultaneous Two-CO Line conferencing (3-party)
4
Station Speed Dial
40
Stratagy DK Systems (per tenant group)
1
Stratagy DK Systems (per system)
2
System LCD Messages
40
System Speed Dial
40
Telephone Page Groups
5
Telephone Group Page simultaneous stations paged
28
Telephone Pickup Groups
20
Tenants
2
Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table
8
Toll Restriction Classes
4
Verified Account Codes
300
Voice Mail Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI)
Yes
1. Requires additional customer-supplied hardware.
2. Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo.
2-2
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Feature Capacities
Table 2-2
DK40i Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots
Lines and PCB Slots
Capacity
Universal slots1
41
CO lines loop start
12
CO lines ground start
12
DID lines (analog)2
12
Tie lines (analog)2
12
T1 lines
8 or 12
DK40i Conf
ISDN BRI line circuits (S/T type and/or U type)3
6 circuits (12 B-channel/lines)
ISDN PRI line circuits
8 or 12 channels
Squared System Maximum (ground/loop lines + stations)
12 lines + 12 stations
Squared System Maximum (Tie/DID lines + stations)
12 lines + 12 stations
iguration
1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit.
2. In the D40i, DID, Tie, and BRI lines do not use up station ports as in DK40 and the DK424, R4. Each BRI line circuit
uses up to two CO lines of system capacity.
3. Each S/T type circuit requires an NT-1 device when connected to a Central Office BRI line circuit.
Table 2-3
DK40i Station and Peripherals Capacities
Stations
Capacity
Add-on modules (DADM)
12
Attendant consoles
0
DKT2004-CT and DKT2104-CT Cordless Telephones (simultaneous calls)
9
DKT2004-CT and DKT2104-CT Cordless Telephones1
28
Door locks
3
Door phones
9
DSS consoles
3
Handset OCA stations
28
Off-premise stations
20
PDIU-DS2
24
RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI (per system)
24
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only (per system)2
24
Speaker OCA stations2
28
Standard stations
20
Telephones DKT
283
Telephones EKT
163
ISDN Terminal Adapters and/or TE-1s combined
10 circuit4
Telephones Strata AirLink Handsets
16
1. The DKT2004-CT and DKT2104-CT cordless telephone connects as either a stand-alone or to a digital 2000-series
telephone.
2. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by PDKU 2B channel slot availability and power supply
limits.
3. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the stations
must be DKTs.
4. In the DK40i, BRI station circuits do not use up CO line numbers as in the DK424, R4. Each BRI station circuit uses
up to two station ports of system capacity. Toshiba BRI (S/T) station circuits are passive and allow up to two devices
to share a circuit. BRI-U allows one device per circuit.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-3
DK40i Configuration
Base Key Service Unit (KSU)
Base Key Service Unit (KSU)
Station and CO Lines
The DK40i Base KSU comes equipped with eight digital telephone station circuits. One of four
optional PCBs can be added to provide either four loop start or DID lines, or two ISDN BRI S/T or
BRI-U circuits (Table 2-4). An optional TCIU2 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) can be added to the
Base KSU loop start line PCB to provide Caller ID interface. An optional KSTU2 PCB can be
added to provide four standard telephone circuits (ports).
Note
An Expansion KSU can be added to the DK40i to increase the system capacity to 28
station ports and 12 lines.
Peripherals
The DK40i Base KSU can support a number of peripherals, which are not considered as stations or
lines and do not affect the maximum station and line capacities. The DK40i Base KSU comes
standard with built-in interfaces for connecting the following dealer-supplied equipment: an
amplifier and speaker for paging and night ringing, Music-on-Hold (MOH) source, reserve power
batteries, and emergency standard telephone for system power failure occurrences when using
loop start lines in the base cabinet.
A relay contact is also provided to control one of the following peripherals: MOH source, night
bell, or page amplifier mute control.
An optional KSTU2 PCB provides an alternate background music source interface. The music
plays through Toshiba telephone speakers, as opposed to the external page speakers.
The optional TSIU PCB provides two RS-232 interface ports to connect two of four options: a
DKAdmin PC (or external modem for remote maintenance); or VM SMDI; or ACD/MIS PC; or an
SMDR port to connect a call accounting device or printer. If more than two interface ports are
needed, an optional interface PCB can be installed in the expansion cabinet to provide up to four
RS-232 interface ports.
2-4
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Base Key Service Unit (KSU)
Table 2-4
DK40i Base KSU Components
Connector
Item
Supports
Standard
Optional
Type
Digital telephones (with or without RPCI-DI or
ADM)
Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS)
Digital telephone circuits (8)
25-pair
Door Phone Lock/Control Unit (DDCB)
Base KSU main PCB (TMAU2)
Amphenol
Digital Direct Station Selection Console
(DDSS)
DK40i Conf
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT)
CO or DID line circuits (4)
RJ11
Loop start or DID lines
(TCOU or TDDU)
modular
2 BRI circuits configure as BRI lines or station
BRI (2 S/T or U type) circuits
8-pair
iguration
ports. S/T type BRI lines require a dealer
(TBSU or TBUU)1
modular
supplied NT-1.
Power Failure Transfer
Standard telephone (one)2
RJ11
Interface (TCOU only)
modular
Battery Backup Interface with
Proprietary
Two 12VDC batteries
connector/
Cable &
built-in charger
batteries
cable
Music-on-Hold/BGM Interface
Music-on-Hold/BGM source2
RCA jack
600 Ohm page Interface
Amplifier/speaker
RCA jack
Standard telephones (no message waiting)2
Other single-line devices2
Standard Telephone Interface
25-pair
Alternate BGM source2
Unit (four-circuit, KSTU2)
Amphenol
Fax machine2
Voice mail/auto attendant devices
Automatic busy redial
Standard telephone ports
DTMF/ABR Receiver (K4RCU3,
Interprets DTMF tones
Internal
K5RCU, or K5RCU2)3
DISA, DID, Tie lines, or auto attendant
Voice Mail
Feature Activation Key
Built-in automated attendant, ACD, ACD/MIS
Internal
(KKYS1~3)
Choice of one:
MOH Source Control
25-pair
Control Relay
Night Bell Control
Amphenol
BGM Mute Control
Internal T/R
Caller ID (TCIU2)
TCOU Caller ID interface
to TCOU
Provides up to two ports for:
Maintenance PC or External modem interface
3-pair
RS-232 ports (TSIU)
Voice Mail SMDI interface
modular
SMDR interface
The TSIU does not support a built-in modem.
1. Each circuit can be set independently for line or station side BRI.
2. Customer-supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division.
3. K4RCU provides four DTMF circuits. K5RCU and K5RCU2 provide five DTMF circuits. Also, K5RCU2 provides the Mu law/
A law jumper.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-5
DK40i Configuration
Expansion KSU
Expansion KSU
The optional DK40i Expansion KSU has four universal slots which can support Stratagy DK, loop
and ground start lines, DID and Tie lines, ISDN BRI lines and stations, Toshiba and analog
stations, and option interface PCBs. See Table 2-5 for detailed information on Expansion Unit
PCBs.
Table 2-5
DK40i Expansion KSU Components
PCB
Circuits per PCB
Interfaces
Connector
RJ14C modular (CO Line
Central office loop start lines
2 CO line circuits/
circuits)
KCDU
4 digital telephone circuits
25-pair Amphenol (digital
Digital circuits same as PDKU2, except no DDSS
telephone circuits)
Digital telephones (with or without RPCI-DI or
ADM)
DDSS console
PDKU2
8 digital telephone circuits
PDIU-DSs
25-pair Amphenol
DDCB
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT,
DKT2104-CT)
Electronic telephones
HDSS console
8 electronic telephone
Alternate BGM source
PEKU
25-pair Amphenol
circuits
EOCU PCB for OCA
External conference amplifier
HDCB
2 standard telephone
circuits/
Standard: same as RSTU (no MW)
PESU
4 electronic telephone
Electronic: same as PEKU, except PESU does
25-pair Amphenol
circuits (standard/electronic
not support HDSS console
telephone ports)
PIOU,
25-pair Amphenol (PIOU,
PIOUS,
A PIOU or PIOUS can use an IMDU. See Table 2-6 for details.
PEPU)
RSSU
Spring clip terminal (PIOUS)
Remote maintenance 300 bps or 1200 bps full-
IMDU
duplex modem for DKi Admin or DKi Backup. 1
None
per PIOU and PIOUS.
ISDN BRI S/T TE-1s and Terminal Adaptors and
2 ISDN BRI S/T circuits
RBSU
ISDN BRI S/T line circuits connected to an NT-1
RJ45
(station or line)1
adaptor.
Two ISDN BRI S/T circuits
1 RBSS subassembly per RBSU. ISDN BRI S/T
RBSS
RJ45
(station only)
TE-1s and Terminal Adaptors.
1 circuit/ISDN PRI
POTS, FX, Tie (senderized & cut through),
RJ48C or RJ48X
RPTU
(8 or 12 B channels/1 D
OUTWATS (intra- & inter-LATA) and InWATS
channel)
ISDN TIA-568A
RJ48M
T1 lines (8 or 12 B channels/
Loop start, ground start, Tie (wink or immediate)
2-pair amphenol (All PCB
RDTU2
1 D channel)
and DID/DOD lines (wink or immediate)
amphenol connectors are
female)
RBUU
Two ISDN BRI U circuits
ISDN BRI U station- or line-side circuits1
RJ11 or RJ45
1 RBUS subassembly per RBUU. ISDN BRI U
RBUS
Two ISDN BRI U circuits
RJ11 or RJ45
station- or line-side circuits
8 or 16 digital circuits for
RWIU
Up to four base stations (16 handsets max.)
RJ12 (6-wire modular jack)
Strata AirLink
2-6
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Expansion KSU
Table 2-5
DK40i Expansion KSU Components (continued)
PCB
Circuits per PCB
Interfaces
Connector
4 Caller ID circuits
Loop or ground start lines with Caller ID.
RCIU2
RJ14C modular
8 circuits with RCIS
Requires: RCOU, RGLU2 or PCOU.
RCOU
4 CO line circuits (lines)
Central office loop start lines
RJ14C modular
Used with RCOU/RCOS, PCOU and RGLU2 CO
RCIS
4 Caller ID circuits
RJ14C modular
line PCBs. 1 RCIS subassembly per RCIU2.
4 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
RDDU
DID lines
RJ14C modular
circuits
DK40i Conf
Without RSTS:
2 Standard telephone/
Digital: Same as PDKU2, except no DDSS
4 Digital telephone circuits
Console
RDSU
25-pair amphenol
With RSTS:
Standard: Same as RSTU2 (standard telephone
4 Standard telephone/
message waiting not available)
iguration
4 Digital telephone circuits
E&M Tie lines
2- or 4-wire transmission
REMU (8-wire modular jack)
Type I Signaling
REMU
4 Tie line circuits
USOC RJ1CX modular, 2- or
Type II Signaling
4-wire/Type I or II
Immediate start
Wink start
Optionally interfaces to the RSTU2 and RDSU to
R48S
8 standard telephone circuits
extend loop length of standard telephones from
25-pair Amphenol
600 ohms to 1200 ohms.
RGLU2
4 Line circuits
Loop or ground start lines
RJ14C modular
Standard telephones
Voice mail ports
Off-premises stations
8 Standard telephone
RSTU2
Other similar devices
25-pair amphenol
circuits
Alternate BGM source
Auto attendant digital announcer
Message waiting lamp generator
2 VM ports
4 VM ports
6 VM ports
Stratagy
8 VM ports
None
None
DK
All the above Stratagy DK
systems use 8 station ports
in the DK40i software.
1 10baseT port,
H.323 standard for Voice
BVPU
4 Virtual Tie line circuits
1 RS-232 maintenance port
over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
1. Each circuit can be set independently for line or station side.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-7
DK40i Configuration
Expansion KSU
Peripherals
An Expansion KSU can support PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU and PEPU PCBs (see Table 2-6 for a list of
options).
PIOU or PIOUS
The PIOU/PIOUS provides one dedicated RS-232 port for Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) connection to a call accounting device and one of the following:
a TTY/RS-232 port which can connect to a customer-provided VM SMDI or external modem
for remote maintenance, or to a local PC with DKAdmin
connectors for an internal modem (IMDU) for remote maintenance and administration
RSSU
The RSSU provides one TTY/RS-232 port for a connection to a VM SMDI or customer-provided
external modem for remote maintenance, or to a local PC with DKAdmin. The RSSU does not
support SMDR or IMDU.
Any device that connects to the PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU should not be considered a station and
does not affect the system's station capacity.
Table 2-6
DK40i Interface PCB Options
DK40i
Interface Options1
RSSU
PIOU
PIOUS
PEPU
TSIU
Base2
Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones)
X
Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohm,
X
duplex)
Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay
X
X
X
X
Door lock or external amplifier control relay
X
X
X
X
IMDU disables TTY output when piggy-backed
X
X
onto PIOU or PIOUS cards
Remote Maintenance using customer-provided
external modem, StrataControl and/or DKAdmin
X
X
X
X
PC (requires TTY output port)
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)
X
X
X
Alarm sensor
X
X
Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)
X
X
X
X
1. Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) on the PIOU and PEPU is not available on the DK40i
2. These functions are standard (built-in) to the DK40i Base KSU.
2-8
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Telephone Circuit (Port) Types
Telephone Circuit (Port) Types
There are four types of telephone circuits to which stations can be connected: digital, electronic,
and standard telephone circuits. Also, there are ISDN (S/T) type telephone circuits, terminal
equipment (TE-1) and terminal adaptor circuits.
Digital Telephone Circuit Connections
The Strata DK40i Base KSU and the PDKU2 PCB each provide eight digital telephone circuits.
Each KCDU and RDSU PCB provides four. The RWIU PCB provides circuits to support up to 16
DK40i Conf
wireless digital telephones.
Note
A maximum of four KCDU PCBs can be installed. If installed, KCDUs should be installed
per configuration tables. The following devices can be connected to digital telephone
iguration
circuits (see Table 2-6). Telephones connected to KCDU PCBs cannot be relocated or
swapped using the station relocation feature.
Table 2-7
Digital Telephone Circuits
Circuits
Digital Device
Comments
Required
Each digital telephone circuit can support a digital telephone.
Digital telephones
Only one of the following options can be installed on a 2000-
series digital telephone: RPCI-DI, DVSU (SP-OCA) or ADMs.
(2000- and 1000-series,
1
Cordless Digital Telephone-
Note
The RPCI-DI) and the Add-on Module (ADM) do not
DKT2004-CT)
require a dedicated circuit. They share a circuit with the
telephone.
Any digital telephone circuit, except for circuit 8 on a PDKU21,
can support a PDIU-DS.
Stand-alone Data Interface
Note
There are two versions of the PDKU2: PDKU21 and
1
Units (PDIU-DS)
PDKU2. The versions are identical, except that circuits
1~8 on the PDKU2 can each support PDIU-DSs/RPCI-DI,
while only circuits 1~7 on a PDKU21 can support PDIU-
DSs/RPCI-DIs.
DDSS consoles can connect only to circuit 8 in the Base KSU
Digital Direct Station
1
and circuit 8 on a PDKU2. The KCDU cannot support a DDSS
Selection Console (DDSS)
console.
Digital Door Phone/Lock
DDCBs can only connect to Port 04 in the Base KSU, and Ports
1
Control Box (DDCB)
12 and/or 20 on either the PDKU2 or KCDU.
Wireless Integrated Handsets
1
Each RWIU supports up to16 Strata AirLink integrated handsets.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-9
DK40i Configuration
Telephone Circuit (Port) Types
Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections
There are no electronic telephone circuits in the Base KSU, and none can be added to it. However,
either the PEKU PCB, which has eight electronic telephone circuits, or the PESU, which has four
electronic telephone circuits, can be installed in the Expansion KSU.
The following devices can be connected to electronic telephone circuits (see Table 2-8).
Table 2-8
Electronic Telephone Circuits
Circuits
Electronic Device
Comments
Required
Electronic telephones
Each electronic telephone circuit can support an electronic
(6500-, 6000-, 3000-, 2000-
1
telephone.
series)
The system supports only one HDSS console. The console must
Electronic Direct Station
2
be connected to both circuits 7 and 8 on the PEKU. The PESU
Selection Console (HDSS)
will not support an HDSS console.
The system supports an alternate BGM source which can be
heard over digital and electronic telephone and external page
Alternate BGM source
1
speakers. This source can be connected to either circuit 3 on a
PEKU, circuit 8 on a PESU, or circuit 4 on a KSTU2 or PSTU
PCB.
Up to three amplifiers for two CO line conferencing can be
Conference amplifier
2
connected to ports 9 and 10; 17 and 18; and 24 and 25 on a
PEKU or PESU.
CAUTION!
You must always calculate the Power Factor (PF)--see Worksheet 2. Exceeding
the PF will cause the power supply to fail. If PF is exceeded, replace EKTs with
DKTs.
Standard Telephone Circuit Options
In addition to supporting standard telephones, each of the standard telephone circuits can support
any one of a number of single-wire-pair devices, including voice mail/Auto Attendant devices and
modems (see Table 2-9).
Table 2-9
Standard Telephone Circuits
Base
Expansion KSU
KSU
RSTU1 or
RDSU/
Standard Telephone Circuits
KSTU2
RSTU2
PESU
PSTU
RSTS
Number of Standard Telephone Circuits
4
8
2
8
2/2
Supports Message Waiting Lamps on SLTs
No
Yes
No
No
No
ISDN Station Devices
Each device requires a DK40i BRI circuit configured for station side, as opposed to line side. Two
BRI circuits are provided by each of the ISDN PCBs. ISDN station devices include ISDN
telephones, modems, terminal adaptors, video cards, etc. A maximum of 10 BRI circuits can be
provided for ISDN stations. BRI station circuits do not use up line capacity in DK40i Release 4.3.
2-10
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide
Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide
Customer:
Location:
This worksheet helps you configure the system. Use the following tables to record the hardware
DK40i Conf
that comprises the system. To ensure that the system port/line capacity is not exceeded, consult
Configuration Tables 2-11~2-13 when you fill out the worksheet tables. After configuring the
system, use Worksheet 2 to ensure that the system power factors are not exceeded.
Be sure to consult "Example Configuration Tables" on Page 2-14 when filling out these tables.
iguration
Table 2-10
Hardware Configuration
Base Cabinet
Expansion Cabinet
Slot
00
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
No.
None
TCOU
None
None
(4 Loop
Start
Lines)
None or
TDDU
K4RCU3,
(4 DID
Universal PCB
PCB
Universal
Universal
Universal
K5RCU
8 DKTs
Lines)
(except
Type
KSTU2
TCIU2
PCB
PCB
PCB
or
Stratagy DK)
TBSU
K5RCU2
4 SLT
4 CLID
(2 BRI S/
T
Circuits)
TBUU
(2 BRI U
Circuits)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-11
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide
Base Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check
Table 2-11
Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Station Port Configuration
Installed (Yes/No)
PCB Type
Port Type
Port Total
Yes
Motherboard
Digital Telephone (8 ports)
8
KSTU2
Standard Telephone (4 ports)
TBUU or TBSU circuit #1
ISDN station side (2 ports)
TBUU or TBSU circuit #2
ISDN station side (2 ports)
Total Base Ports (16 ports max.) =
Table 2-12
Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Line Configuration
Installed (Yes/No)
PCB Type
Number of Line Types
Line Total
TCOU
Loop start (4 lines)
TDDU
Direct Inward Dial (4 lines)
TBUU or TBSU circuit #1
ISDN line side (2 lines)
TBUU or TBSU circuit #2
ISDN line side (2 lines)
Total Base Lines (4 lines max.) =
Base and Expansions Cabinet Port/Line Capacity Check
Use to Table 2-13 make sure that the capacity of ports and/or lines is not exceeded. If a PCB
causes the ports or lines capacity to be exceeded, that PCB will not function. Refer to Tables
2-11~2-14 when filling in Table 2-13 to determine the DK40i Expansion Capacity.
Table 2-13
Strata DK40i Base and Expansion CO Line Configuration
Expansion
PCB
Port Type or Line Type
Ports
Lines
Slot No.
Installed
15
16
17
18
Total Ports and Lines in Expansion slots (15~18)
(from Table 2-14)
Total Base Unit ports and lines
(from Tables 2-11 and 2-12)
Total DK40i Base/Expansion ports and lines
(28 ports/12 lines max.)
2-12
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide
Expansion Capacity
Table 2-14
Strata DK40i Expansion PCB Port/Line Capacity Reference Table
Expansion PCB
Port/Line Type
No. of Ports
No. of Lines
PCOU
Loop Start Lines
0
4
RCOU
Loop Start Lines
0
4
RCOU/RCOS
Loop Start Lines
0
8
RGLU
Ground or Loop Start Lines
0
4
DK40i Conf
RDDU
Direct In Dial Lines
0
4
REMU
E&M Tie Lines
0
4
PEMU
E&M Tie Lines
0
4
iguration
KCDU
Digital Ports/Loop Lines
4
2
PDKU2
Digital Telephone Ports
8
0
RSTU2
Standard Telephone Ports
8
0
RWIU
Strata AirLink Wireless Interface
8 or 16
0
Stratagy DK
Built-in Voice Mail System
8
0
RDSU
2 Standard/4-Digital Telephone Ports
8
0
RDSU/RSTS
4 Standard/4 Digital Telephones ports
8
0
PEKU
Electronic Telephone Ports
8
0
PESU
2 Standard/4 Electronic Telephone Ports
8
0
RBSU
Both circuits line side
0
4
2-ISDN BRI S/T
Both circuits station side
4
0
circuits
1 station and 1 line circuit
2
2
RBSS
2 ISDN BRI S/T circuits (station side only)
4
0
RBUU
2 circuits, station side
4
0
2-ISDN
2 circuits, line side
0
4
BRI-U circuit
1 circuit, station side/1 circuit, line side
2
2
2 circuits, station side
4
0
RBUS 2-ISDN
2 circuits, line side
0
4
BRI-U circuit
1 circuit, station side/1 circuit, line side
2
2
RDTU
T1 Lines
0
8 or 12
RPTU
PRI Lines
0
8 or 12
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-13
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide
Example Configuration Tables
Table 2-15
Hardware Configuration Example
Base Cabinet
Expansion Cabinet
Slot
00
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Number
KSTU2
RBSU/
PCB Type
K5RCU2
8 DKTs
TBSU
None
PDKU2
RCOU
PIOU
4 SLT
RBSS
Table 2-16
Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Station Port Configuration Example
Installed
PCB Type
Port Type
Port Total
Yes
Motherboard
Digital Telephone (8 ports)
8
Yes
KSTU2
Standard Telephone (4 ports)
4
Yes
TBSU circuit #1
ISDN station side (2 ports)
2
Yes
TBSU circuit #2
ISDN station side (configured as lines)
Total Base Ports (16 ports max.) =
14
Table 2-17
Strata DK40i Base Cabinet Line Configuration Example
Installed
PCB Type
Number of Line Types
Line Total
No
TCOU
Loop start (4 lines)
No
TDDU
Direct Inward Dial (4 lines)
Yes
TBSU circuit #1
ISDN line side (configured as stations)
Yes
TBSU circuit #2
ISDN line side (2 lines)
2
Total Base Lines (4 lines max.) =
2
Note
One TBSU circuit is configured as a station-side BRI and one circuit is line-side BRI.
Table 2-18
Strata DK40i Base and Expansion CO Line Configuration Example
Exp.
PCB
Port Type or Line Type
Ports
Lines
Slot No.
Installed
15
PDKU
8 Ports
8
RBSU/
16
4 Ports and 4 Lines
4
4
RBSS
17
RDDU
4 Lines
4
18
PIOU
None
Total Ports & Lines in Expansion slots (15~18)
12
8
Total Base Unit ports and lines
14
2
(from Tables 2-16 and 2-17)
Total DK40i Base/Expansion ports & lines
26
10
(28 ports/12 lines max.)
Note
Two RBSU circuits are configured as line-side BRI and two RBSS circuits are station-side
BRI.
2-14
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Configuration Considerations
Configuration Considerations
The following considerations should be taken into account when filling out the tables in
"Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide" on Page 2-11.
Base Cabinet
1. Only one line PCB (TCOU, TDDU, TBSU or TBUU) can be installed in the Base cabinet.
2. If TBSU or TBUU is installed, each circuit can be configured independently as a station side
DK40i Conf
or line side BRI circuit.
3. Each TBSU or TBUU ISDN BRI circuit uses two station ports and no line numbers if the
circuit is configured for the station side.
iguration
4. Each TBSU or TBUU ISDN BRI circuit will use two line numbers and no station ports if the
circuit is configured for the line side.
5. TDDU provides four DID lines and does not use station ports.
6. Install TCIU2 for Base KSU CO (TCOU) Caller ID Lines.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, do not install TCIU1 in the DK40i system.
7. K5RCU, K5RCU2 or K4RCU3 must be installed when using built-in automated attendant
(AA), ACD, ACD/MIS, Voice Mail, ABR, Stratagy DK, standard telephone ports, Tie lines,
DISA, or DID Lines.
8. KKYS1~3 is required for built-in AA; KKYS2 for AA and ACD; KKYS3 for AA, ACD/MIS.
9. TSIU can be used for an RS-232 Maintenance (TTY) port, SMDI, ACD/MIS or SMDR port.
RSIU cannot be used.
Expansion Cabinet
1. Each RDDU provides four DID lines and does not use station ports. This is different from the
DK40 and DK16e in which each DID circuit used a line number and station port.
2. Each REMU to PEMU provides the four Tie lines and does not use station ports. This is
different from the DK40 and DK16e in which each Tie line circuit used a line number and
station port.
3. Stratagy DK can be installed in the expansion unit to provide two, four, six or eight built-in
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail circuits. Always install Stratagy DK in slot 15, 16, or 17; do
not install Stratagy DK in slot 18. Program the Stratagy VM ports as if they were standard
telephone ports connected to an external VM device. All models of Stratagy DK use up eight
station ports.
4. Install RCIU2/RCIS in slot 17 (only) for Expansion KSU (RCOU/RCOS or RGLU2) Caller
ID Lines.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, do no install RCIU1 in DK40i, and RCIU2
must not be installed in slot 18.
5. If required, install PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU in any slot.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-15
DK40i Configuration
Configuration Considerations
6. Speaker OCA and RPCI/DIU data applications can only be installed on digital telephone ports
in the DK40i Base KSU and slots 15 and 16 of the DK40i Expansion KSU (24 maximum).
7. RWIU can be installed in any of the expansion cabinet slots (15, 16, 17, and 18) to support up
to 8 StrataLink handsets. If there are 9 to 16 handsets, the RWIU must be installed in slot 15
and slot 16 must be vacant. This system cannot support 24 or 32 handsets because of a port
limitation.
8. RDTU can provide 8 or 12 T1 lines software programmable. Install RDTU in slot 15. Slots
16, 17, and 18 can be used for other PCBs.
DK40i ISDN
Configure DK40i, ISDN BRI PCBs (RBSU, RBSS, TBSU and TBUU) with the following rules
1. TBSU or TBUU installs in the base cabinet to provide 2 BRI circuits, each circuit can be
station side or line side in any combination. See the ISDN section in this manual for more
information regarding TBSU and TBUU.
2. If a TBSU or TBUU is installed, TDDU or TCOU cannot be installed. Only one PCB (TSBU,
TCOU or TDDU) can be installed in the DK40i base cabinet for a given DK40i configuration.
3. RBSU or RBUU installs in any expansion unit slot to provide 2 BRI circuits which can be
station side or line side in any combination.
4. RBSS installs on an RBSU and RBUS install on an RBUU in any expansion unit slot; each
PCB combination provides 4 BRI circuits total. RBSS can be station side only; RBSU can be
station or line side.
5. Each ISDN BRI circuit uses two station ports and no line numbers if the circuit is configured
for station side. This is different from the DK424 ISDN in which each BRI circuit uses two
station ports and two line numbers when the circuit is configured for station side.
6. Each ISDN BRI circuit will use two line numbers and no station ports if the circuit is
configured for the line side. This is different from DK424 ISDN, in which each BRI circuit
uses two station ports and two line numbers when the circuit is configured for line side.
7. Total maximum BRI circuits on the station side is 10 (20 ports/B-channels max.).
8. Total maximum BRI circuits on the CO line side is 6 (12 lines/B-channels max.).
9. RPTU can provide 8 or 12 PRI lines software programmable. Install RPTU in slot 15. Slots
16, 17, and 18 can be used for other PCBs.
2-16
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 2 System Power Factor Check
Worksheet 2 System Power Factor Check
The DK power supply was engineered for maximum cost efficiency to provide power for the most
configurations. Because of this design, some power limitations exist when using old electronic-
type telephones, telephone option hardware, or newer PCBs, such as RWIU, TBSU, RBSU/RBSS.
Telephone/Device PFs
The power supply of each KSU supplies a limited amount of power. For each KSU, calculate the
total Telephone/Device Power Factor (PF) and add it to Table 2-24. (See Table 2-10 for PCB
DK40i Conf
quantity and type.)
The TBSU, RBSU/RBSS and RWIU PCBs require more power from +5VDC than other PCBs;
therefore, it is necessary to calculate the +5VDC and -24VDC PF on DK40i.
iguration
Important!
A system PF check must be performed for all configurations. See Table 2-19 for the
power supply +5VDC and -24VDC PFs for the DK40i system.
Table 2-19
DK40i System Power Factor
Power Supply
Max+5VDC PF
Max -24VDC PF
AC Input Current
TPSU16A
14
39
1.8A
Note
AC current limitation by National Electric Code.
Important!
The -24VDC system PF is Expansion KSU PCBs and all telephone/options
connected to the Base and Expansion KSUs. Base KSU option PCBs are already
covered for -24VDC PF.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-17
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 2 System Power Factor Check
System Power Factors PCB/Telephone Device
Use the information in Table 2-20 to complete Tables 2-24 and 2-25.
Table 2-20
DK40i PCB's Power Factors
PCB Type
+5VDC PF
-24VDC PF
PCB Type
+5VDC PF
-24VDC PF
K5RCU2
0.6
NR1
RWIU
9.2
0.0
K5RCU
0.6
NR
IMDU
0.3
0.16
K4RCU3
0.6
NR
RSSU
0.6
0.3
TSIU
0.6
NR
RCIU2
0.6
0.2
TCOU
1.6
NR
RCIS
0.3
0.1
TBSU
2.5
NR
PEKU
2.5
0.7
TBUU
NR
NR
PESU
1.6
0.5
KSTU2
1.0
NR
RMCU
0.6
0.3
TDDU
1.8
NR
RMCS
0.6
0.3
TCIU
0.4
NR
REMU2/PEMU
1.5
7.5
PDKU1, 2
0.8
0.3
RDDU
3.0
7.0
KCDU
1.5
1.2
RGLU2
2.5
2.5
PSTU/RSTU (-24V)
2.0
0.5
RBSU
2.5
1.0
RSTU2/R48S (-48)
3.5
1.0
RBSS
0.6
0.3
RSTU2
3.5
0.5
RBSU/R40S
2.5
3.8
RDSU (-24V)
1.5
0.3
RBSU/RBSS/R40S
3.1
4.1
RDSU (-48V)
1.5
0.5
RBUU
NR
0.75
RCOU
2.5
2.0
RBUS
NR
0.25
RCOU + RCOS
4.5
4.0
RBUU+RBUS
NR
1.0
PCOU1, 2
2.0
2.0
RDTU
1.8
1.0
PIOU
2.5
6.5
RPTU
2.6
1.0
PIOUS
2.0
4.0
BVPU
0
7.0
1.NR = Power Factor Not Required.
Table 2-21
DK40i Telephone/Device Power Factors
Telephone Devices
X
-24VDC PF
2000-series Digital Telephone (any series)
X
1.0
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT)
X
1.0
2000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
3000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.5
6000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
6005-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
6500-series Electronic Telephone
X
1.0
DDCB/HDCB (w. MDFB)
X
1.2
DDSS/HDSS Console
X
0.8
Add-on Module
X
0.4
RPCI-DI
X
0.5
PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DS
X
0.8
Standard Telephone (-48VDC)
X
1.0
Standard Telephone (-24VDC)
X
0.5
Power Failure Unit (DPFT)
X
3.0
HHEU
X
0.1
Stratagy DK
X
1.0
Total -24VDC PF of all Telephone Devices
2-18
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 2 System Power Factor Check
Worksheet Examples
Table 2-22
DK40i Telephone/Device 24 Volt Power Factor Worksheet Example (Base/Expansion KSU)
Telephone Devices
Quantity
X
24VDC PF
=
24VDC Total
2000-series Digital Telephone (any series)
16
X
1.0
=
16.0
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT)
X
1.0
=
2000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
=
3000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.5
=
6000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
=
6005-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
=
DK40i Conf
6500-series Electronic Telephone
X
1.0
=
DDCB/HDCB (w. MDFB)
X
1.2
=
DDSS/HDSS Console
X
0.8
=
Add-on Module
X
0.4
=
iguration
RPCI-DI
8
X
0.5
=
4.0
PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DS
X
0.8
=
Standard Telephone (-48VDC)
X
1.0
=
Standard Telephone (-24VDC)
X
0.5
=
Power Failure Unit (DPFT)
X
3.0
=
HHEU
X
0.1
=
Stratagy DK
X
1.0
=
Total -24VDC PF all Telephone Devices
=
20.0
Note
It is not necessary to consider the 5 volt PF for telephone devices.
Table 2-23
DK40i PCB and Power Factors Worksheet Example
In the following example, the total DK40i PFs, 10.2 PF for the +5VDC PF category and 26.5
TPSU16 maximum +5VDC PF = 14; Maximum -24VDC PF = 39.
PCB Installed
Base PCBs
+5VDC PF
-24VDC PF
Yes
No
K5RCU2
X
0.6
NR
K5RCU
X
NR
K4RCU3
X
NR
TSIU
X
NR
TCOU
X
NR
TBSU
X
2.5
NR
KSTU2
X
1.0
NR
TDDU
X
NR
TCIU
X
NR
Expansion Unit PCBs
PCB Name
Slot 15
RBSU (2TE)
2.5
3.8
Slot 16
RBSS (2NT)
0.6
0.3
Slot 17
KCDU
1.5
1.2
Slot 18
KCDU
1.5
1.2
Telephone Devices from Table 2-22
N/R
N/R
20.0
Total DK40i PF =
10.21
26.51
1. Power factors are within limits. If power factors are exceeded, the system size must be reduced to stay
within PF limits.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-19
DK40i Configuration
Worksheet 2 System Power Factor Check
PCB and Power Factor Worksheets
See examples on previous pages.
Table 2-24
DK40i Telephone/Device Power Factor Worksheet (Base and Expansion Telephones)
-24VDC PF
Telephone Devices
Quantity Installed
X
-24VDC PF
=
Total
2000-series Digital Telephone (any series)
X
1.0
=
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT)
X
1.0
=
2000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
=
3000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.5
=
6000-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
=
6005-series Electronic Telephone
X
2.0
=
6500-series Electronic Telephone
X
1.0
=
DDCB/HDCB (w. MDFB)
X
1.2
=
DDSS/HDSS Console
X
0.8
=
Add-on Module
X
0.4
=
RPCI-DI
X
0.5
=
PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DS
X
0.8
=
Standard Telephone (-48VDC)
X
1.0
=
Standard Telephone (-24VDC)
X
0.5
=
Power Failure Unit (DPFT)
X
3.0
=
HHEU
X
0.1
=
Stratagy DK
X
1.0
=
Total -24VDC PF of all Telephone Devices
=
Table 2-25
Power Factor Worksheet
PCB Installed
Base PCBs
+5 Volt PF
-24 Volt PF
Yes
No
K5RCU2
K5RCU
K4RCU3
TSIU
TCOU
TBSU
TBUU
KSTU2
TDDU
TCIU
Expansion Unit PCBs
PCB Name
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18
-24VDC PF of telephones/devices from Table 2-24
Total DK40i PF =
Note
If power factors exceed the maximum (+5VDC= 14, -24VDC = 39), the system size must
be reduced to stay within PF limits
2-20
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Configuration
Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility
Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility
Expansion Units that are compatible with various Base KSUs are shown in Table 2-26.
Table 2-26
Compatible Base KSUs and Expansion Units
Expansion Unit
Base KSU
DK40i
DK16e
DK16
DK16
X
X
X
DK16e
X
X
DK40i Conf
DK40
X
X
DK40i
X
X
X = Expansion Unit is compatible with Base KSU.
iguration
Upgrades
DK40i, (R4.1) can be upgraded to DK40i (R4.3) by changing a ROM chip (order the DK40i, R4.3
Upgrade kit). DK40i, R1 is the only DK that can be upgraded to DK40i, R2. To upgrade DK40i R1
to the DK40, R4.3, the DK40i R4.1 base cabinet must be DKSUBI40A V.1B or higher. If the Base
KSU is DKSUB40IA V.1A, it cannot be upgraded for ACD, T1 or PRI, etc. See FCC label on the
side of the cabinet.
Note
DK40i systems which do not require an upgrade to allow T1, PRI, etc., are identified as
DKSUBI40A V.2A or higher.
The Strata DK16 Base KSU cannot be upgraded to a DK16e, DK40 or DK40i and the DK16
Expansion Cabinet is not compatible with the DK16e, DK40 or DK40i. The Strata DK40i is not a
modification of the DK40, but rather a completely new system.
The DK40i uses the DK40 expansion cabinet. The DK16e can be upgraded to DK40 by changing
a ROM chip, but not to a DK40i. The DK40 base cabinet cannot be upgraded to a DK40i.
DK16/DK16e/DK40/DK40i Component Compatibility
The original DK16 two-loop start CO line and four-digital station interface unit (KCDU1A) is
forward compatible with the DK16e or DK40i.
Most DK16 PCBs are not compatible with the DK40i, including the four-port Standard Station
Interface Unit (KSTU1A), four-circuit DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver Unit (K4RCU1A or
K4RCU2A), and the Auto Attendant feature cartridge (KFCU1A).
Four of the Strata DK40i PCBs are backward compatible with the DK16, DK16e and DK40. They
are: KSTU2A, K4RCU3A, K5RCU and K5RCU2. The DK40i Expansion Cabinet is also
backward compatible with the DK16.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
2-21
DK40i Configuration
Base/Expansion KSU Compatibility
Table 2-27 shows the component compatibility between the Strata DK16 components with the
DK16, DK16e, DK40 or DK40i systems.
Table 2-27
Strata DK16 Components
Strata DK16 Components
Compatible
Part
Description
DK16
DK16e
DK40
DK40i
DKSUB16A
DK16 Base Cabinet
X
KSTU1A
4-Standard Telephone Interface Unit
X
K4RCU1A &
4-DTMF/ABR Tone Receiver
X
K4RCU2A
KFCU1A
Auto Attendant Feature Cartridge
X
DKSUE16A
DK16 Expansion Cabinet
X
KCDU1A
2-Loop CO AND 4-DKT Interface Unit
X
X
X
X
KPSU16A
Replacement Power Supply for DK16
X
X = Components are compatible.
Table 2-28 shows the component compatibility between the Strata DK16e, DK40 and DK40i
components with the DK16, DK16e, DK40 or DK40i systems.
Table 2-28
Strata KD16e/DK40i Components
Strata DK16e/DK40/DK40i Components
Compatible
Part
Description
DK16
DK16e
DK40
DK40i
TCOU1A
4-Loop CO Line Interface Unit
X
X
X
TDDU1A
4-DID CO Line Interface Unit
X
X
X
TCIU2A
Caller ID Interface Unit
X
X
X
TSIU1A
2-I/O Serial Interface Unit
X
X
X
KSTU2A
4-Standard Telephone Interface Unit
X
X
X
X
K4RCU3A,
4- or 5-DTMF/ABR Tone Receiver (only 4 DTMF
K5RCU1A or
X
X
X
X
receivers will operate on DK16 and DK16e)
K5RCU2A1
KKYS1A
Auto Attendant Feature Key
X
X
X
DKSUE16A
DK16 Expansion Cabinet
X
DKSUET16A
DK16e Expansion Cabinet
X
X
X
X
DKSUE40A
DK40i Expansion Cabinet
X
X
X
X
KCDU1A
2-Loop CO and 4-DKT Interface Unit
X
X
X
X
TPSU16A
Replacement Power Supply for DK40i
X
X
X
TBSU1A
2-circuit ISDN BRI S/T Unit
X
RBSU1A
2-circuit ISDN BRI S/T Unit
X
RBSS1A
2-circuit ISDN BRI S/T Unit
X
RBUU
2-circuit ISDN BRI U Interface Unit
X (R4.3)
RDTU
T1 Interface Unit
X (R4.3)
TBUU
2-circuit ISDN BRI U Interface Unit
X (R4.3)
RPTU
ISDN PRI Interface Unit
X (R4.3)
RBUS
2-circuit ISDN BRI-S/T Interface Unit
X (R4.3)
1. For 9~12 DID and/or Tie lines, use K5RCU1A or K5RCU2A, not the K4RCU3A.
2-22
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
3
This chapter explains how to install the Strata DK40i, Release 4.3 system. It includes information
on site requirements, wiring diagrams, and step-by-step instructions on how to install the unit(s),
the ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (battery backup) cabling, and PCB cabling.
D
Inspection
K40
i Installation
1. When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If
any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and
make the proper claims.
2. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect
all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier
immediately.
3. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system
hardware.
Packaging and Storage
CAUTION!
When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back
(soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges.
When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power
supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be
packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure
to package equipment in its original shipping containers.
Site Requirements
This section defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating
environment for the DK40i. Also included are grounding requirements.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-1
DK40i Installation
Site Requirements
Input Power
The system requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 amps. The AC
outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third-wire ground. (See "AC
Power and Grounding Requirements" on Page 3-4.)
This eliminates interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like, and to prevent accidental
power-off. To avoid accidental power turn-off, Toshiba recommends that you do not use an On/Off
wall switch on this dedicated AC circuit.
For the Strata DK40i, a reserve power source (two customer-supplied 12VDC batteries) may be
connected to the system to serve as a power failure backup.
Clearance and Location
The minimum clearance requirements for the Strata DK40i Base and Expansion KSUs are shown
in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. Refer to Page 3-5 for DK40i KSU mounting instructions.
Top View
Top View
3.5"
Wall
Expansion
Base
3.5"
Wall
3 Feet
3 Feet
Front View
Front View
2"
20"
2"
2"
2"
12.25"
2"
2"
DK40i
Base KSU
Expansion
DK40i
18"
Unit
Base KSU
18"
4235
2"
4234
2"
Figure 3-1
DK40i Base KSU Clearance
Figure 3-2
DK40i Base KSU and Expansion
Requirements
KSU Clearance Requirements
Consider the following conditions when selecting a location for the KSU(s):
The location must be:
Dry and clean
Well ventilated
Well illuminated
Easily accessible
3-2
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Site Requirements
The location must not be:
Subject to extreme heat or cold
Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants
Subject to excessive vibration
Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment
If reserve power is to be installed for the Strata DK40i, the batteries will require a well-ventilated
location close (within nine feet) to the DKSUB40 (the optional Toshiba-supplied battery cable is
nine feet in length).
Table 3-1 provides a summary of the electrical and environmental characteristics
Table 3-1
Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK40i Primary Power
Input AC (Power Supply Specification)
85~135VAC
AC frequency
50/60 Hz
Power
DK40i - 75 watts maximum
AC input current
1.8A maximum
DK
Environmental Specifications
40
Operating temperature
32~104° F (0 ~40° C)
i Installation
Operating humidity
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
Storage temperature
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
-24VDC (-25.94~-28.66VDC)
DC voltage output specification
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
-5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion KSU only
Battery Charger Characteristics
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC
KSTU2, PSTU or PESU (Circuits 1 and 2)
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Ring Voltage
Low position 130 ± 20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability
2 REN maximum per circuit, high or low position
KSTU2, PSTU, or PESU modem interface
14,400 bps maximum
data rate
RSTU, RSTU2 or RDSU
Ring Voltage
80V RMS sine wave
Ringing capability
1.5 REN per circuit, with or without Message Waiting
RSTU2 Message Waiting Voltage
-90VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.)
RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU modem interface
14,400 bps maximum
data rate
Traffic Rating Characteristics
9 CCS per station system-wide
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-3
DK40i Installation
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
The DK40i requires a solid earth ground for proper operation.
The AC power cord contains a conductor
for the "third-wire ground" provided by
Ground 1
Third Wire Ground
the commercial power outlet. The third-
To AC Power Cord
wire ground should be the only ground
Third Wire
DK40i Base KSU
necessary for the DK40i; this ground
AC Ground
must originate at the buildings main
Power
power distribution panel and have a solid
Supply
4' 5"
connection to earth ground. (See Figure
3-3.)
A
AC Voltage
Electrical Building
115VAC
CAUTION!
Lack of proper ground
Ground (Main Power
± 10VAC
Distribution Box)
may cause improper
AC Current
FG
operation and, in extreme
1.8 amps max.
4236
cases, system failure.
Alternate Ground
Grounding Rod
Figure 3-3
DK40i Grounding Diagram
AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test
Test the "third-wire ground" for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third
prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a
commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the
following earth ground test procedure.
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the
following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage.
To perform the earth ground test procedure
1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC.
2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires)
on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground). Either the same
reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained.
4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe
to the second voltage terminal.
CAUTION!
If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to
green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit
Steps 5 and 6, and see following CAUTION!
5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a reading of 100~125VAC on the other terminal
is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet.
3-4
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
6. Set the meter to the "OHMS/Rx1" scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other
probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than 1
ohm.
CAUTION!
If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded.
If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly
grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National
Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected.
Alternate or Additional Ground
If the "third-wire" AC ground can not practically be improved or if extreme motor noise or other
disturbance causes system malfunction, or if local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct
ground may be warranted.
Connect a separate earth ground from a cold water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the FG
screw terminal on the DK40i power supply (see Figure 3-3).
DK40
KSU Mounting Considerations
i Installation
The Base KSU and the optional Expansion KSU are both designed to be mounted on a wall or
other vertical surface. Toshiba recommends using method 1 or 2 (see Figure 3-4).
Prior to Installation
1. Loosen the screws on the front cover and the side cover of the Base KSU, remove the covers
(see Figure 3-5). Figure 3-6 on Page 3-11 details the interior.
2. Place the BATT jumper plug to the On position.
3. Install a CO line board, either the TDDU or TCOU onto the TMAU board (see Figure 3-6).
The TCOU provides four loop start CO lines and can accommodate the Caller ID interface
unit.
The TDDU provides four DID lines.
4. Set CO line card switches.
TCOU: Set the TCOU PAD switches (SW400-SW475) to the appropriate position (see Figure
3-21 on Page 3-32). The factory setting is NORMAL. If CO lines are connected to a PBX or
are in close proximity to the central office the PAD position may be required.
TDDU: Set the TDDU PAD switches to the appropriate position. Also, set the high/low
voltage jumper plugs as required for proper dial pulse operation.
See Figure 3-22 on Page 3-34.
5. If you are not installing a TCIU2, skip to Step 6. To install the TCIU2 (see Figure 3-20 on
Page 3-29), align the prongs P20, P21, and P22 over P120, P121, and P122 of the TCOU and
gently press down. Slip the plastic stand-off hook through the hole.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install TCIU1 in the DK40i system.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-5
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
6. The TCOU or TDDU cards have a green and yellow wire with a two-prong spade on the end.
Slip the spade under the second screw from the right on the power supply (see Figure 3-6).
7. If applicable, install KSTU2 Standard Telephone Interface Unit. The KSTS2 comes pre-
installed onto the KSTU2. Then install both boards into the DK40i Base KSU (see Figures
3-17~3-19, beginning on Page 3-26).
8. If applicable, install the K5RCU or K5RCU2 or K4RCU3 (which provides Automatic Busy
Redial and DTMF tone detection) into the Base KSU (see "K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2
Installation" on Page 3-23).
9. If applicable, install the KKYS (which provides built-in Auto Attendant) onto the K5RCU or
K5RCU2 or K4RCU3.
10. If applicable, install the TSIU Serial Interface PCB into the KSU (Figure 3-23 on Page 3-37).
If the TSIU is used for SMDR or TTY, then the PIOU/PIOUS SMDR/TTY output is not
active.
Testing the System's Power Supply
If the "AC" or "DC" LEDs fail to light in Steps 1 or 3, see TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset
Procedure on Page 7Case 1.
1. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet (see Figure 3-8). The "AC" LED on the power supply
lights green.
2. Turn On the DC power switch for the TPSU16 power supply (see Figure 3-6). The "DC" LED
on the power supply lights green.
3. Using a voltmeter or other device which checks voltage, measure the voltages referenced to
frame ground (FG) at the P16 connector pins (test points) located on the motherboard. The
voltages should fall within the ranges below.
Yellow-green, black, and green wires: 0V
Two yellow wires: -27V
Range: -25.94V~-28.66V
If the voltages do not fall within the ranges, unplug the DC power pins from the P16 connector
and measure again at the same location; if the ranges remain unacceptable. See TPSU16
Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure on Page 7Case 2.
3-6
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
TPSU16 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure
Case 1
If the AC and DC LEDs on the TPSU16 power supply in the Strata DK40i Base KSU do not light,
even though the AC power plug is inserted into the wall outlet and the TPSU16 DC power switch
is turned on, the AC overvoltage circuit breaker may have opened.
To reset the AC overvoltage circuit breaker
1. Remove the AC power plug from the wall outlet, turn the DC power switch Off, and wait six
minutes.
2. After six minutes, insert the AC plug back into the wall outlet and turn the DC power switch
On. The AC and DC LEDs should turn on and the system should operate.
If the system fails to operate, either the wall outlet is not providing AC power or the system's
power supply is defective.
3. If the AC power checks good, replace the power supply (see "Power Supply Removal and
Replacement" on Page 3-19).
Case 2
DK40
If the TPSU16 power supply AC and DC LEDs light, but the system does not operate, the TPSU16
i Installation
DC output overcurrent circuit breaker may have opened because of a DC short circuit.
To reset the DC output overcurrent circuit breaker
1. Turn the DC power switch Off for 15 seconds and then turn it back on. The system will go
back to normal operation if the overcurrent breaker resets.
2. If the system continues to fail, press in the two -24VDC circuit breakers located on the bottom
left corner of the TPSU16 power supply.
If, then, the system does not return to normal operation, the TPSU16 power supply may be
defective or an optional PCB may be shorting out the TPSU16.
3. Remove all optional PCBs and the Expansion KSU to locate the short, then repeat Steps 1 and
2 and perform the power supply test.
4. If the power supply fails the test, replace the power supply (see "Power Supply Removal and
Replacement" on Page 3-19 for more information.). If the power supply passes the test, the
DK40i Base KSU is probably defective.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-7
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Mounting the Base KSU
WARNING!
To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply switch is turned Off.
To mount the Base KSU
1. Place the Base KSU on the desired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of
the four screw holes (there is one on each corner). See Figure 3-6.
Make sure the location of the Base KSU meets the minimum clearance requirements specified
in Figure 3-1 on Page 3-2.
Note
The Base KSU AC power cord is 4 feet 5 inches long.
2. Drill holes on these marks.
If mounting the KSU directly to a wall, align screws with studs behind the wall. If using a hard
board between the KSU and the wall, install screws first to the hard board, and then secure the
hard board to the wall, making certain that screws are aligned with studs.
3. Secure screws approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the mounting
surface.
4. Hang the unit from the top two screws and then secure the screws completely into the
mounting surface.
5. Finish securing the unit to the mounting surface by completely screwing the bottom two
screws into the wall.
6. Ground system according to "AC Power and Grounding Requirements" on Page 3-4.
7. Connect applicable wiring (e.g., modular CO line cords, 25-pair amphenol connector cable
see Figure 3-25 on Page 3-42) to the Base KSU and then fasten wiring to the unit with the tie
wrap that comes with the Base KSU (see Figure 3-8 on Page 3-13). Remove amphenol
connector clamp from plastic bag that comes with the Base KSU. Fasten the clamp to hold the
amphenol connector.
8. Connect Reserve batteries and plug battery cable into BATT connector of the KPSU16 power
supply (see "Reserve Power Option" on Page 3-17).
9. If the Expansion KSU is going to be installed, refer to "Mounting the Expansion KSU" on
Page 3-9. If not, proceed to Step 1.
10. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn On the power supply switch.
11. Reinstall the front and side covers onto the Base KSU.
3-8
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Mounting the Expansion KSU
Important!
For purposes of identification, the labels appear on the boxes and Expansion KSUs
(see Table 3-2).
Table 3-2
Expansion Unit Labels
DK40i
DK40
DK16e
DK16
Expansion Unit Box Labels
DKSUBI40A
DKSUB40A
DKSUBT16A
DKSUB16A
Model
Model
Model
Expansion KSU Model No.
Model DKSUE16
DKSUE40A1
DKSUE40A
DKSUET16A
(expansion case bottom)
Strata DK16
Strata DK40
Strata DK40
Strata DK16e
1. Strata DK40 may appear on a label.
WARNING!
To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply switch is turned Off.
To mount the Expansion KSU (see Figures 3-4, 3-6, 3-8~3-11)
1. Make sure the side cover is removed from the Base KSU. Turn Base KSU DC power switch
D
Off.
K40
2. Set the Expansion KSU on the Base KSU's hinge mounts, making sure that the Expansion
i Installation
KSU sets properly in place.
3. Remove the safety lock from plastic bag that comes with the Expansion KSU. Install safety
lock to the Base KSU as shown.
4. Pull out on the safety lock until it can no longer be moved, securing the Expansion KSU to the
Base KSU. Do not detach the lock from the Base KSU.
5. Connect the Expansion KSU ribbon cable to the connector on the Base KSU. Close ribbon
cable connector lock on Base KSU.
6. Connect Expansion KSU green/yellow ground wire plug (FG2) to TB1 of the Base KSU.
(Make sure the plug locks on FG2.)
7. Making sure that the Expansion KSU is flush against the mounting surface, mark the location
of the Expansion KSU mounting screw hole.
8. Swing the Expansion KSU away from the mounting surface, and drill a hole at the mark made
in Step 7.
9. Install the PCBs per "Worksheet 1 System PCB Assignment Guide" on Page 2-11 and slide
the slot lock to the lock position.
10. Swing the Expansion KSU back to the mounting surface and secure it to the surface with a
screw.
11. Connect the wiring (e.g., modular CO line cords, 25-pair amphenol connectorper
Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring) to the PCBs.
12. Fasten the wiring with Tie wraps (supplied) to the bottom of the expansion and Base KSUs.
13. Knock out the tab on the bottom of the side cover.
14. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and then turn On the power supply switch.
15. Install the side cover to the Expansion KSU.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-9
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Method 1
Method 2
Plaster
Stud
Board
Hard Board
Plaster Board
Stud
(1/2 Inch Plywood)
Expansion
KSU
Expansion
KSU
Base KSU
Base KSU
1614
Figure 3-4
KSU Wall Mounting
Cover
Screws (6)
AC
DC
POWER
Base Cover
Side Cover
= Six cover screws
to be removed
before mounting
Model: DKSUBI40A
KSU
Strata DK40i
Label on edge of
Base KSU
4237
Figure 3-5
Base KSU Exterior
3-10
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
PN2
12
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
+
MODEL TPSU16A
INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ
Reserve Power
OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A
AC
DC
V. 1A 1996-05 00001
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
MADE IN
DC POWER
12
-
BATT
Battery Jack
-24 Volt Circuit
WARNING
Hazardous voltage inside!
If servicing required
Breakers
remove A. C. plug.
Connect Expansion
FG2
Unit TB1 TO FG2
is required for expansion
DK
Important Notice
40
i Installation
DKSUE16A is incompatible with this unit
DKSUET16A or DKSUE40A
Base Telephone
Expansion KSU
IMPORTANT:
Tip/Ring and
OFF
TMAU2A
Cable Receptacle
ON
Relay Contact
Battery Jumper
Music-on-Hold
Input
4238
Music-on-Hold
Sensitivity Adjustment
Figure 3-6
DK40i Base KSU Interior
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-11
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Optional with TCOU
(provides Caller ID)
TC1U2A
FG Screw
V1
+
TCOU1A
-
TDDU1A
V1
Install a TCOU, TBSU
Install a TCOU, TBSU
or TDDU here
Install a TCOU, TBSU,
TBUU or TDDU here
FS
FS
LOS
LOS
5220
TBSU1A
TS
TS
BSY
BSY
CO10
BSY
CO14
CO11
TS
CO15
TBUU1A
CO12
PSI
CO16
CO13
FS
CO17
Figure 3-7
CO Line Board Installation into DK40i Base KSU
3-12
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
AC
POWER
DC
DK40
AC Power Cord
i Installation
Do not route power
cord with other cords.
Modular
Connector
Self-Adhesive
Rubber Pad
Supplied in
plastic bag
with Base KSU.
Amphenol
Tie Wrap1
Clamp
RCA Plug
Supplied in
plastic bag
Tie Wrap
Amphenol
with Base KSU.
Holder
Connector
Modular
Cord (X5)
Base KSU
Amphenol
Cord (X1)
PIN Jack
Cord (X2)
2161
Figure 3-8
Base KSU Cables and Connectors
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-13
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Base KSU
Hinge Mount
TB1 (FG2)
Expansion KSU
Green/Yellow
FG2 Wire and Plug
(From Expansion
KSU Plugs into
P3
TB1 of Base KSU)
Ribbon
Connector
Lock
PULLK
LOC
PUSH
CK
LO
UN
Safety Lock
(Supplied with
Expansion KSU)
Ribbon Cable
(from Expansion KSU Plugs into
Expansion Connector (P3) of Base KSU)
2162
Figure 3-9
Base to Expansion KSU Connection
3-14
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Expansion
Expansion
KSU
Safety Lock
FG Screw
Base KSU
PN2
12
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
+
MODEL TPSU16A
INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ
PULL
OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A
AC
DC
V. 1A 1996-05 00001
LOCK
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
MADE IN
DC POWER
12
-
BATT
PUSH
WARNING
UNLOCK
Hazardous voltage inside!
If servicing required
remove A. C. plug.
FG2
FG2 Wire
Ribbon Cable
D
to Expansion KSU
K40
i Installation
Expansion
KSU Latch
Mounting Hole
and Screw
TMAU2A
4241
AC Cord (4'4")
Tie Wrap Holder
Model DKSUE40A
Label on edge of Expansion KSU
Figure 3-10 Expansion KSU Mounting and Connections
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-15
DK40i Installation
KSU Mounting Considerations
Expansion KSU
Slot Lock
Slot label
S06
S07
PCB
Lock
S04
S05
Side Cover
4242
Figure 3-11 Expansion KSU Slot Lock
The DK16e Expansion Cabinet can be used on the DK40i Base Unit. The DK16e and DK40i
Expansion Cabinet slot labels are different from the Program 03 slot numbers. Table 3-3 provides
the slot labels and Program 03 slot numbers.
Table 3-3
DK16e and DK40i Expansion Cabinet Slot Names
DK40i Slot Label
DK40i Program 03 Slot Number
S04
S15
S05
S16
S06
S17
S07
S18
3-16
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Reserve Power Option
Reserve Power Option
A reserve power source (two customer supplied 12VDC batteries) can be connected to the DK40i
power supply to ensure uninterrupted system operation in the event of a power failure. A pre-
assembled interface cable for installation of the Reserve Power option is available from Toshiba
(PBTC-3M), see Figure 3-12.
TPSU40
Two-prong Male
Connector
(pre-assembled)
PBTC-3M
Battery Cable with
Ring Terminals
and PPSU Connector
+
White
(length - 9 feet)
BATT
Black
In-line Fuse Holder 10 A
(Fuse Provided)
Black
White
Power Supply
16AWG
D
Actual Size
K
+
+
40
i Installation
12 VDC
12 VDC
Battery
Battery
Black Jumper with
Ring Terminals
2164
Ring Terminals 3/8 In.
(provided)
Figure 3-12 System Power Supply Wiring
Important!
Local ordinances may dictate battery type and installation details.
The batteries require a well-ventilated location within nine feet of the system (the interface cable is
nine feet long).
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these
instructions:
Use only 12VDC gelcell batteries.
Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. The cells may explode. Check
with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released electrolyte is corrosive
and may cause damage to the eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed.
Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with
conduction materials such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery or
conductor may overheat and cause burns.
Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with this product
only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this
manual.
Observe proper polarity orientation between the batteries and battery
charger.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-17
DK40i Installation
Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option
Reserve Power Installation
1. Connect the PBTC-3M black jumper wire from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to
the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. See Figure 3-12.
2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC-3M
battery cable.
3. Connect the white lead of the PBTC-3M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the
12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC
battery.
Important!
The KSU must be connected to the live operating (hot) AC power source, and the
power supply On/Off switch set to On prior to the final step of connecting the
reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the
batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function.
4. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable two-prong male plug to the power supply BATT +/-
receptacle.
5. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plug with the power supply
power On/Off switch in the On position. The system should continue to operate without any
interruption.
6. Plug the AC power cable into PN2.
7. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and turn On the power supply switch.
8. See "Prior to Installation" to confirm that the power supply is working properly.
9. Plug reserve battery cable into BATT connector of power supply.
Power Failure Emergency Transfer Option
To enable this option, a dedicated standard telephone must be connected to the Power Failure
Transfer Interface (PF1) of a DK40i Base KSU equipped with a TCOU.
Note
During normal operation, this telephone cannot be used and does not count as a station
(does not reduce the number of system's available stations).
If there is a power failure, the telephone automatically is connected to CO Line 1. When power is
restored, the system resumes normal station and CO line assignments, and the dedicated telephone
becomes inoperative again.
Important!
This is not available on a DK40i system with a TDDU installed.
Installing Power Failure Emergency Transfer
Connect a standard telephone to the PF1 connector in the Base KSU (see Figure 3-13).
Testing Power Failure Emergency Transfer
1. Turn the system power switch Off.
2. Lift the emergency standard telephone handset, and verify that there is CO dial tone.
3-18
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Power Supply Removal and Replacement
Power Available
MDF
TCOU
Connection
2
T
3
CO
TCOU
Line
CO Line 1
R
4
5
MOD Jack CO1
(Base KSU)
Power Fail
MDF
Connection
R
T
PFT
Standard
Telephone
MOD Jack PF1
(Base KSU)
2155
DK40
Figure 3-13 Base KSU Power Failure Transfer (PFT) Circuit Diagram
i Installation
Power Supply Removal and Replacement
The power supply (TPSU16A) comes factory-installed in the Base KSU; if necessary, it can be
removed and replaced.
Power Supply Removal
1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off and that the AC power cable is not plugged into
an outlet. Confirm that the green AC LED is not lit (see Figure 3-14).
3
4
2
FG4
PN2
12
FG
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
+
MODEL TPSU16A
INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ
OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A
AC
DC
V. 1A 1996-05 00001
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
MADE IN
DC POWER
12
-
BATT
1
WARNING
-24V
Hazardous voltage inside!
If servicing required
-24V
remove A. C. plug.
FG1
FG2
1643
8
7
6
5
Figure 3-14 Power Supply (TPSU16A)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-19
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
2. Unplug reserve battery cable from BATT connector of power supply.
3. Unplug the FG2 plug from the Expansion KSU ground wire.
4. Unplug the DC cable from the DC OUT connector (P16).
5. Remove the FG screw from left side of power supply to free FG wire/terminal and building
ground wire.
6. Unplug the AC power cord from PN2.
7. Remove the seven screws that attach the power supply to the Base KSU. Remove the power
supply.
Power Supply Replacement
1. Set the power supply in its proper place in the Base KSU (see Figure 3-14).
2. Secure the power supply to the Base KSU with the seven screws.
3. Connect the FG1 wire from the TCOU or TDDU to the FG1 screw on the power supply.
4. Plug the DC cable into the DC OUT connector. The green/yellow wire is on right-hand side.
5. Fasten FG green wire ring terminal and building ground wire to the left side of the power
supply with the FG screw.
6. Plug the Expansion KSU green/yellow ground wire into FG2.
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
This section details Strata DK40i system PCBs installation into the Base and Expansion KSUs.
Also described are optional configuration information and programming considerations for each
PCB.
Base KSU PCBs
The Strata DK40i processor is built into the motherboard (TMAU2) and comes with eight digital
telephone circuits (ports). The line circuits are on the TCOU or TDDU PCBs, which attach to the
P10, P11 and P12 connectors on the TMAU. The PCBs that can be installed into a DK40i KSU are
shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-4
DK40i Base KSU PCBs
PCB
Provides
Installs On
Comments
TCOU
Four loop start CO line circuits
Only one TCOU, TBSU,
TDDU
Four DID line circuits
TMAU2
TDDU or TBUU can be
motherboard
TBSU
2 BRI (S/T) circuits
installed on the motherboard.
TBUU
2 BRI (U) circuits
To prevent system
TCIU2
Four caller ID circuits
TCOU
malfunction, do not install a
TCIU1 in the DK40i system.
3-20
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
Table 3-4
DK40i Base KSU PCBs (continued)
PCB
Provides
Installs On
Comments
KSTU2
Four standard telephone circuits
Only one TSIU can be
Up to two serial interfaces
installed per DK40i system.
TSIU
(TTY and SMDR)
When installed, the TSIU
TMAU2
does not use a slot.
motherboard
Recognizes DTMF tones generated by a standard
K5RCU2,
telephone and is required for DISA, Tie and DID
K5RCU or
lines and the DK40i built-in Auto Attendant. Also
K4RCU3
used to detect busy tone for the ABR feature.
K5RCU2,
KKYS
Automated Attendant
K5RCU or
K4RCU3
Toshiba recommends installing the Base KSU option PCBs, K5RCU2, K5RCU or K4RCU3 and/
or KSTU2, before mounting the Base KSU on the wall. Install the Expansion KSU per Page 3-9,
then install the Expansion KSU option PCBs.
D
The Base KSU slots 00~14 are automatically assigned the following codes in Program 03 when
K40
the system is turned on and the Base KSU PCBs are installed.
i Installation
Slot 00: Code 91 without K4RCU3; Code 92 with K4RCU3; Code 98 with K5RCU2 or K5RCU
Slot 11: Code 62 eight digital telephones with OCA/DIU, 64 for OCA/DIU/DSS.
Slot 12: Code 11 for TCOU, 16 for TDDU or 77 for TBSU (four loop, four DID lines or two BRI
circuits).
Note
If installing TBSU, set each BRI circuit for station side or line side before installing more
PCBs. Each BRI station circuit uses two station ports and each BRI line circuit uses two
CO lines.
Slot 13: Code 31, four KSTU2 ports
Slot 14: Code 81, four TCIU2 circuits
Expansion KSU PCBs
A DK40i Expansion KSU from the factory does not come with any PCBs installed. (Table 2-5 on
Page 2-6 for a list of PCBs supported by the DK40i Expansion KSU and Chapter 9 Universal
Slot PCBs for detailed descriptions/installation instructions.) Toshiba recommends that PCBs
which support electronic, digital or wireless telephones be installed into slots 15 and 16 because
slots 17 and 18 cannot support speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) or Data Interface Units
(DIUs) or more than 8 wireless handsets. See the section titled "Expansion KSU" on Page 2-6 for
configuration information for DK40i PCBs.
PCB Hardware/Software Options
PCBs can be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are
defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to
connection of peripheral equipment, such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Hardware and
software options for each PCB are identified in the individual PCB installation procedures in this
chapter.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-21
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
PCB Hardware Options
Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB.
Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB
installation procedures in this chapter and Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring. Configuration
instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation.
PCB Software Options
After installation of the PCBs in the KSU, configure the PCBs for software options through
programming. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in this chapter. Refer to the
Strata DK Programming Manual for more detailed programming instructions.
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations
WARNING!
To avoid electrical shock, make sure that the power supply is Off whenever
removing or installing PCBs.
Before installing any PCBs, make sure the power supply has been tested, and the ground has been
checked. (See "AC Power and Grounding Requirements" on Page 3-4.)
PCB Wiring
See "MDF Wiring Diagrams" on Page 3-42 in this chapter for DK40i Base KSU wiring and
Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring for Expansion KSU wiring.
See Chapter 18 Strata AirLink Systems for RWIU wiring.
Digital Telephone Circuits
The eight digital telephone circuits that come standard with the system are integrated into the
DK40i motherboard in the Base KSU. These circuits are identical to the digital circuits found on
the PDKU. The motherboard does not have to be configured for the digital circuits to operate. For
wiring, see "MDF Wiring Diagrams" on Page 3-42.
3-22
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
K4RCU3, K5RCU and K5RCU2 - DTMF Receiver/ABR
Tone Detector Unit
System:
DK40i Base KSU
Circuits per PCB: K4RCU3: four DTMF receivers and four ABR busy tone detectors
K5RCU, K5RCU2: five DTMF receivers and five ABR busy tone detectors.
Interfaces with:
automatic busy redial (ABR)
interprets DTMF tones
DISA, DID, Tie lines
built-in auto attendant
Older Version(s):
K4RCU (not compatible with DK40i)
K4RCU3 or K5RCU (compatible with DK16 and DK40i
The K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard
telephone circuit) and to enable ABR to operate. The K5RCU2 is the same as the K5RCU, except
that it has jumper settings for A law and Mu law, which makes it applicable to more countries.
DK
Configuration
40
i Installation
The K4RCU3, K5RCU, or K5RCU2 does not have to be configured for operation. If built-in auto
attendant is required, see auto attendant KKYS installation.
K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Installation
1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off.
2. Make sure SW1 is set for Mu law if installing K5RCU2. The jumper must be set for Mu law in
the U.S. and Canada.
3. Making sure that the component side of the K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 is face down
(toward the power supply), plug the K4RCU3, K5RCU P602A and P602B female connectors
into the P2A and P2B (K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2) connectors on the motherboard. See
Figure 3-15.
K4RCU, K5RCU or K5RCU2 Programming
Program 03: Enter code 92 for Slot 00 if K4RCU3 is installed or Code 98 with K5RCU or
K5RCU2.
Program 12: Sets K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 release time.
Program 15: Sets K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2 operation after CO line flash. Assigns DTMF/
Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-23
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2
KKYS Connector
2165
Figure 3-15 Auto Busy Redial/DTMF Receiver Board (K4RCU3, K5RCU or K5RCU2) Installation
KKYS - Auto Attendant
System:
DK40i Base KSU
Circuits per PCB: one
Interfaces with:
optional built-in auto attendant
Older Version(s):
none
The KKYS installs onto the K5RCU2 card in the Base KSU. (See Figure 3-16.)
KKYS Installation
Install the KKYS onto the K5RCU2 to add the optional built-in auto attendant feature.
KKYS
MU
K5RCU2A
SW1
A
3799
Figure 3-16 K5RCU2 Printed Circuit Board
3-24
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
KSTU2 - Four-circuit Standard Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Base KSU
Circuits per PCB: four standard telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
standard telephones (no message waiting)
other single-line devices
alternate BGM source (circuit 4)
fax machine
voice mail devices
Older Version(s):
KSTU1 (not compatible with DK40iKSTU2 is compatible with DK16 and DK40i)
KSTU2 controls and indicators are illustrated in Figures 3-17 and 3-18 and described in Table 3-5
on Page 3-27.
Note
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by
standard telephones (or any other device connected to a KSTU2 port), a K4RCU3 must be
installed in the Base KSU.
D
KSTU2 Configuration
K40
The KSTU2 hardware has to be configured only for the square wave ring generator voltage level,
i Installation
nothing else.
KSTU2 Installation
1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off.
2. Before installing the KSTU2 in the Base KSU, set the SW1 ring generator to 130V P-P or
190V P-P.
Note
Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require 190; however, some devices may
experience ring-trip at 190, and should be set at 130.
3. Plug the KSTU2 cable into the P4 connector on the motherboard in the Base KSU. The red
wire on the cable should match up with pin 1 on the lower side of the connector.
4. Plug the KSTU2 P508 female connector into the P8 male connector on the motherboard.
5. Secure the KSTU2 to the standoffs with the two provided screws.
KSTU2 Wiring
Refer to DK40i Base KSU KSTU2 wiring in Figure 3-25 on Page 3-42.
The KSTU2 must be connected to a OL13A (or equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations
(300 ohms loop resistance max., including the telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance).
KSTU2 Programming
Program 03: Specify code 31 for KSTU2 slot.
Program 31: Configures all KSTU2 ports connected to voice mail (see Chapter 10 Universal Slot
PCB Wiring for voice mail installation).
Program 10-2: Not required for Background Music (BGM) connection.
Program 19: BGM connection to KSTU2 Port 11.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-25
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
CAUTION!
Port numbers in the Expansion KSU shift by four ports if KSTU2 or TDDU is
installed (or removed after it is installed). This determines whether or not the
DDCB can be connected on the KCDU in slot 15.
SW1
KSTU2A
1629
Figure 3-17 Standard Telephone Interface Board (KSTU2)
UP
1630
KSTS2A (reverse)
Figure 3-18 Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (KSTS2)
3-26
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
Table 3-5
KSTU2 Controls and Interface Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Sets ring generator voltage level for all
circuits:
Ring voltage jumper plug SW1
3-terminal jumper
H = 190V P-P
L = 130V P-P
Connects to P4 connector on the
Connector cable P504
Cable
motherboard
P10 (connects to KSTS2 P20)
7-pin connector
Interface connector for optional
P11 (connects to KSTS2 P21)
9-pin connector
KSTS2. The KSTS2 arrives installed
P12 (connects to KSTS2 P22)
3-pin connector
onto the KSTU2 from the factory.
P13 (connects to KSTS2 P23)
5-pin connector
DK40
i Installation
KSTU
P4
KSTU2A
24/140-3T
UP
KSTS2A
KSTU2A
1633
Figure 3-19 KSTU2/KSTS2 Installation
TBSU
See "RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units" on Page 16-13 in Chapter 16 ISDN Interfaces for
TSBU installation documentation.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-27
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
TCIU - Caller ID
System:
DK40i Base KSU (mounts on TCOU)
Circuits per PCB: four caller ID circuits
Interfaces with:
caller ID
loop start CO lines
Older Version(s):
none
To receive Caller ID, a TCIU2 circuit must be available to each line. (See Figure 3-20.)
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, do not install TCIU1 in the DK40i system.
Each TCIU2 Caller ID circuit has a two-wire tip/ring interface which must be bridge-wired across
its corresponding ground or loop start CO line tip/ring. This is done automatically by the PCB
connectors when the TCIU2 is mounted on the TCOU. However, if installing an RCOU/RCIU2 in
the Expansion KSU, the connection is made on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). See the
RCIU wiring diagram in Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring.
TCIU2 Installation
1. Turn power Off.
2. Install the TCIU2 onto the TCOU PCB by aligning the three sets of connectors marked TCOU
or TCIU2, depending on the card.
3. Press down evenly and firmly on the TCIU2 card.
TCIU2 Programming
Program 03: Automatically assigns TCIU2 (Caller ID circuit) to slot 14 (code 81) when the TCIU2
is installed and power is turned on.
Note
TCIU2 Caller ID circuits are numbered automatically in numerical order starting from
01~04 when the TCIU2 is installed. Slots with code 81 will increment the Caller ID circuit
numbers by four circuits on the DK40i.
Program *50: Assigns TCOU lines that will receive Caller ID to the associated TCIU2 Caller ID
circuit number. TCIU2 circuits 1~4 must be assigned to TCOU circuits 1~4, respectively. RCIU
circuits 5~8 should be assigned RCOU or RGLU circuits 5~8.
After assigning CO lines to Caller ID circuits, turn system power Off for approximately five
seconds and then back on or run Program 91-2 to activate Program *50 assignments.
Program *51: Sets the Caller ID (CLID)/Automatic Dialed Number Identification (ANI) memory
allocation for the appropriate stations. This memory is used to save CLID/ANI telephone numbers
for calls that are received but not answered (abandoned calls). CLID/ANI numbers are not saved in
station memory if they are answered. Stations can be allocated with memory to save up to 100
numbers in 10-number increments.
The total memory allocated to all stations in a system is 200 numbers.
Note
When a CO line rings multiple stations, a station must be the owner of the Caller ID or
ANI CO line to be able to save abandoned call (Caller ID and/or ANI) telephone numbers.
(See Program *52.)
3-28
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
Program *52: Assigns stations as owners of Caller ID CO lines. These stations will store the Caller
ID telephone numbers received on abandoned (not answered) calls for the lines which they own.
Typically all common CO lines are assigned to one designated telephone or attendant console and
private lines are assigned to individual private line telephones.
Note
A station must also be allocated with Caller ID/ANI storage memory in Program *51 to
store abandoned call telephone numbers.
Program 39, Code 462: Assigns the Caller ID/ANI Lost Call Auto Dial button to LCD telephones
that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A user can scroll through the
stored abandoned call phone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this button.
Program 60-1, Key 01: Determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port,
e.g., system Account Codes or CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers.
Turn LED 01 On if CLID and/or ANI information should be sent out the SMDR port.
Turn LED 01 Off if Account Codes information should be sent out the SMDR port.
Note
The system will initialize with LED 01 Off, e.g., Account Codes information will be sent
out the SMDR port.
DK40
i Installation
P20
1335
P22
P21
Figure 3-20 DK40i Caller ID Interface Unit (TCIU2)
Table 3-6
TCIU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
P20
5-pin plug
To P120 of TCOU
P21
9-pin plug
To P121 of TCOU
P22
9-pin plug
To P122 of TCOU
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-29
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
TCOU - Four-circuit Loop Start CO Line Board
System:
DK40i Base KSU (mounts on KSU TMAU)
Circuits per PCB: four loop start CO line circuits
Interfaces with:
loop start lines
Older Version(s):
none
The optional TCOU PCB installs onto the TMAU motherboard. (See Figure 3-21 and Table 3-7
for information on controls, indicators and connectors.)
Note
Only one TCOU or TDDU can be installed on the motherboard.
TCOU Hardware Options
The TCOU PCB accepts the optional Caller ID (TCIU2 not TCIU1) board. When the TCIU2 is
installed on the TCOU, the tip/ring of the TCOU circuits 1~4 are automatically connected to the
tip/ring of TCIU2 circuits 1~4 respectively.
TCOU Installation or Replacement
1. Make sure the power supply (TPSU16A) DC power switch is Off.
2. Mate the TCOU male connectors P110, P111, P112 to P10, P11 and P12 respectively on the
TMAU. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper connection. See Figure 3-6 for installation
information and Figure 3-27 on Page 3-44 for wiring.
3. Secure the three plastic stand-off tabs and install screws in upper right and lower left corners.
4. Set decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the appropriate
position. In most cases set to the normal position (NOR). Switches are factory set at the 0 (0
dB signal level drop) position. If CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to
the central office, set the PAD positions to 3 to provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the
PBX and CO.
5. Slip the spade connected to the green/yellow wire under the second screw from the right on the
TPSU power supply (see Figure 3-21). Tighten the screw until the spade is snugly secured.
TCOU Removal
If you need to remove/replace the TCOU, make sure the power supply (TPSU16A) DC power
switch is turned Off.
To remove the TCOU
1. Loosen the screw on the TPSU power supply and free the spade.
2. Loosen and remove screws securing the TCOU to the TMAU (see Figure 3-21).
3. Pull back the three plastic stand-off tabs and pull up on the TCOU until P110, P111 and P112
are unplugged.
3-30
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
TCOU Programming
Program 03: Code 11 is specified automatically when TCOU is installed.
Program 10-1: Enables or disables line-to-line Conference and Direct Inward System Access
(DISA).
Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line.
Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines; AR is
automatically enabled for ground start CO lines.
Program *15: Makes tenant assignments.
Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups.
Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones.
Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing).
Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only).
Programs 45~48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line.
Programs 50~56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments.
DK
Program 78: Assigns special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote
40
Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Integrated Auto Attendant.
i Installation
Programs 81~89
Assigns lines to ring selected stations and DH groups.
Assigns Delayed Ringing to any line.
Programs *81, *84, *87: Assigns which [DN] will flash when the CO line rings a telephone.
Program 93: Assigns names to lines.
TBUU and TBUS
See the ISDN section in this manual for installation of ISDN BRI PCBs.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-31
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
CO4
P122
CO3
V1
CO2
CO1
TCOU1A
P121
PF1
P120
1447
Figure 3-21 DK40i Loop Start CO Line Board (TCOU)
Table 3-7
TCOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
CO line connectors 1~4
Modular connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits.
PF1
Modular connector
Power Failure Telephone Interface
PAD switch SW202, SW302,
Enables -3 dB signal level drop for CO line
2-position slide switch
SW402 (circuits 1~4)
circuit
P120
6-pin connector
To P20 of TCIU2
P121
10-pin connector
To P21 of TCIU2
P122
10-pin connector
To P22 of TCIU2
3-32
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
TDDU - Four-circuit DID Line Digital Telephone
Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Base KSU (mounts on KSU TMAU)
Circuits per PCB: four DID line circuits
Interfaces with:
DID lines
Older Version(s):
none
The optional TDDU PCB installs onto the TMAU motherboard. (See Figure 3-22 and Table 3-8
for information on controls, indicators and connectors and Figure 3-27 for wiring.)
Note
Only one TCOU or TDDU can be installed on the motherboard.
TDDU Installation
1. Make sure the power supply (TPSU16A) DC power switch is Off.
2. Mate the TDDU male connectors P110, P111, P112 to the TMAU female connectors. Apply
DK
firm, even pressure to ensure proper connection. (See Figure 3-6 on Page 3-12 for installation
40
and Figure 3-27 on Page 3-44 for wiring.)
i Installation
3. Secure the three plastic stand-off tabs and install screws in the upper right and lower left
corners.
4. Set decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the appropriate
position. Switches are factory set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. If CO lines are
connected to a PBX or are in close proximity to the central office, set to the PAD positions to 3
to provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO.
5. Sensitivity jumpers SW102~SW402 are used mostly for dial pulse operation to adjust for dial
pulsing at different loop lengths. If close to the CO, the sensitivity should be set to low (L). As
the loop length increases, set it to high (H).
6. Insert the TDDU into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors.
TDDU Programming
Program 03: Specify Code 16 for slots that will support TDDUs. Make sure DTMF operation is
enabled.
Note
Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91 run instead.
Program *09: Assigns DID line extensions to route to station [PDNs].
Program 10-1: Enables or disables Two-line Conference.
Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, and additional attributes to each line.
Program *15: Makes tenant assignments.
Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups.
Program *17: Assigns intercept port for DID calls to wrong or vacant numbers.
Program 17: Tie and DID line options.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-33
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
Assigns Immediate or Wink start to DID lines and auto camp-on and no-dial tone return
for DID lines.
Assigns DID lines to route per DNIS and ANI options (Program 71 and 72) or DID
numbers (Program *09).
Program 30: Disables BRCS for dial pulse operation.
Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing).
Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only).
Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line.
Programs 45~48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line.
Programs 50~56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments.
Programs 71 (1~5): Assigns DNIS or ANI option to DID lines.
Programs *71~*73: Assigns telephone to ring called [DN].
Program 93: Assigns names to lines.
The TDDU provides four DID lines and does not use four station ports when installed.
TDDU1A
V1
DID4
SW401
VOL
H L
DID3
SW402
SW301
VOL
H L
DID2
SW302
SW201
VOL
H L
DID1
SW202
SW101
VOL
H L
1349
SW102
PAD Switches
CO Line Circuits
(SW101 ~ 401)
(DID1 ~ 4)
2-terminal
Jumper Plugs
Figure 3-22 DK40i DID CO Line Board (TDDU)
3-34
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
Table 3-8
TDDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Lights to indicate DID line circuit is
CO line busy LEDs 1~4
Red LED
operating. Trunk indicator will not light
(DID1~DID4)
unless TDDU is connected to a DID line.
Interface connector for CO line (DID)
CO line connector (DID)
Modular connector
circuits.
PAD switch SW202, SW302,
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO
Two-position slide
SW402 (circuits 1~4)
line circuit (when set in PAD position).
SW102, SW202, SW302, SW402
Adjusts for dial pulsing at different loop
2-terminal jumper plug
(circuits 1~4)
lengths.
CAUTION!
Port numbers in the Expansion KSU shift by four ports if KSTU2 or TDDU is
installed (or removed after it is installed). This determines whether or not the
DDCB can be connected on the KCDU in slot 15.
DK40
i Installation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-35
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
TSIU - Serial Interface Board
System:
DK40i Base KSU (plugs into KSU main PCB)
Circuits per PCB: two TTY/RS-232 interface ports
Interfaces with:
SMDR connection for call accounting device
customer-provided external modem for local/remote maintenance from a PC with
DKi Admin
Older Version(s):
none
The TSIU PCB enables the DK40i system to connect to various hardware devices. It does not have
an internal modem and does not support IMDU. (See Figure 3-23.)
Only one TSIU can be installed per DK40i system. When installed, the TSIU port functions are
identified and enabled automatically when power is turned on and the PIOU can still be installed
for zone paging. Port 01 is TTY (Program 76-1, code 1) and Port 02 is disabled (Program 76-1,
code 0). If the same function is programmed for an TSIU port and a PIOU or PIOUS port, only the
TSIU port functions.
The communication parameters for all TSIU TTY ports are:
Data word bits = 7
Parity = even
Stop bits = 1
The communication parameters for a TSIU SMDR port is:
Data word bits = 8
Parity = none
Stop bits = 1
TSIU Installation
See Figure 3-23 for installation.
TSIU Programming
Program 03: No assignment is necessary. TSIU is automatically enabled when installed and power
is turned On. It is not assigned to a slot.
Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed TSIU port to a function. Where X identifies the TSIU
port number (1~4) and Y identifies the TSIU port function:
Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 Off)
Y=2, SMDR
Y=4, SMDI
Y=0, No function - this should be used for any TSIU ports that are not used.
Note
Function codes set in Program 76-1X-Y override PIOU and/or PIOUS function codes 41
set in Program 03.
3-36
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Installation
Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed TSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate.
Where X identifies the TSIU Port number (1, 2). Z identifies the TSIU/port transmission rate in
bits-per-second (bps):
Z=1; 9600
Z=2; 4800
Z=3; 2400
Z=4; 1200
Note
The sum of TSIU port 1 and port 2 bps rate cannot exceed 9600 bps.
DK40
SIO#2 SIO#1
i Installation
1634
SIO#2 SIO#1
TSIU1A
Figure 3-23 Serial Interface Board (TSIU) Installation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-37
DK40i Installation
Universal Slot PCBs
Universal Slot PCBs
The following PCBs can be used in the universal slots of either the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU
or the Strata DK424 cabinets (see Table 3-9).
Table 3-9
Universal Slot PCB Descriptions
PCB
Title
Description
Page
CO Line/Digital
Provides two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone
KCDU
9-4
Interface Unit
circuits.
Digital Telephone
Provides eight digital telephone circuits that can support the same
PDKU
9-10
Interface Unit
peripherals as the digital circuits in the Base KSU.
Provides eight electronic telephone circuits that can interface with
Electronic Telephone
PEKU
electronic telephones, an alternate BGM source, an HDSS, an
9-12
Interface Unit
external amplifier for DISA or two CO line conferencing.
Standard/Electronic
Provides two standard telephone or two-wire device circuits/four
PESU
Telephone Interface
9-17
electronic telephone circuits in the Expansion KSU.
Unit
PIOU &
Provides interfaces for SMDR, IMDU and external zone paging -
Option Interface Unit
9-21
PIOUS
(PIOU only).
Adds four CO lines to the system and can only be installed in the
RCOU
CO Line Interface Unit
Expansion KSU. Assigns Delayed Ringing to any CO line. You
9-32
cannot piggy-back a RCOS.
Provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines. Each line can have
RDDU
DID Line Unit
9-37
one office code and a block of extensions.
Digital/Standard
Provides two standard telephone circuits and four digital telephone
RDSU
Telephone Interface
9-41
circuits.
Unit
REMU
E&M Tie Line Unit
Provides four Tie line circuits.
9-43
Loop/Ground Start CO
RGLU2
Provides four line circuits.
9-47
Line Interface Unit
RSSU
PC Interface Unit
Provides two RS-232 connections.
9-55
Has eight circuits that support single-line devices, such as: rotary
and push-button standard telephones, fax machines, dictation
Standard Telephone
equipment, modems, a separate BGM source, off-premises
RSTU2
9-58
Interface Unit
stations, Toshiba voice mail (Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP), digital
announcement devices for the optional built-in auto attendant
feature and customer-supplied voice mail devices.
Supports Digital Wireless Handsets: same as PDKU, except no
RWIU
Strata AirLink Unit
DDSS console, Stand-alone Cordless Telephone, PDIU-DS, or
18-37
DDCB.
The Stratagy voice mail systems come with 2, 4, 6, or 8 voice mail
Stratagy
Stratagy Voice Mail
ports. All of the Stratagy DK systems use 8 station ports in the
12-41
DK
Unit
DK40i and DK424 software.
ISDN S/T-type Basic
RBSU provides two BRI S/T circuits. Each circuit provides two
RBSU/
Rate Interface Unit and
simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface.
16-13
RBSS
Basic Rate Interface
The RBSS attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI S/T
Subassembly
type circuits that can be used for station-side connections only.
3-38
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
Universal Slot PCBs
Table 3-9
Universal Slot PCB Descriptions (continued)
PCB
Title
Description
Page
RBUU/
2 ISDN BRI, U point circuits (2B+D each). RBUU is the host for the
SDN BRI-U Interface
16-31
RBUS
RBUS subassembly. Network and/or station side.
DK40i and DK424i: 1 circuit/ISDN PRI.
RPTU
ISDN 24-channel PRI
DK424i: 23 B channels/1 D channel.
16-9
DK40i: 8 or 12 B channels/1 D channel.
Provides 1~8, 1~12, 1~16, or 1~24 channels (lines), depends on
RDTU
T1/DS1 Interface Unit
8-8
system programming.
Combines fucntsions of a 4-circuit REMU E&M Tie line card and a
BVPU
Voice Over IP Gateway
Voice Over Internet Protocol (IP gateway on a single PCB. H.323
9-6
standard for Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP).
DK40
i Installation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-39
DK40i Installation
Loop Limits
Loop Limits
This section provides the maximum loop lengths for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral
equipment, and power supplies. The following information applies to only the Strata DK40i
system (see Table 3-10). Diagrams that are applicable to all systems, including the DK40i, can be
found in Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring.
Table 3-10
Digital Telephone/DIU/DDSS Console/ADM/Loop Limits
Maximum line length (24 AWG)
DK40i KSU or
Mode
1 Pair plus
Battery Backup1
1 Pair
2 Pair2
feet meters
feet meters
external power3
DKT or Cordless base Ringing
DK40i KSU
1000
303
(Volume Max)
Battery Backup
675
204
DK40i KSU
1000
303
DKT with DVSU (OCA)
Battery Backup
495
150
1000
303
DK40i KSU
1000
303
DKT with HHEU or Carbon Handset
Battery Backup
330
100
DKT with PDIU-DI/
DK40i KSU
495
150
PDIU-DI2/RPCI-DI
Battery Backup
165
50
675
200
DK40i KSU
1000
303
1000
303
PDIU-DS
Battery Backup
675
204
1000
303
1000 feet
DKT with HHEU and
DK40i KSU
495
150
1000
303
303 meters
RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2
Battery Backup
33
10
330
100
DK40i KSU
1000
303
DDSS2060A
Battery Backup
500
151
DK40i KSU
1000
303
DDCB
Battery Backup
500
151
1000
303
DK40i KSU
1000
303
DKT with DVSU and HHEU
Battery Backup
165
50
DK40i KSU
675
204
DKT with ADM
Battery Backup
165
50
DK40i KSU or
Mode
Maximum line length (24 AWG)
Battery Backup4
1. Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively.
2. Digital telephones and other digital devices can operate at maximum lengths with two pair wiring or an external power source.
3. Digital cable runs must not have the following:
Cable splits (single or double)
Cable bridges (of any length)
High resistance or faulty cable splices
4. Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively.
3-40
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
DK40i Secondary Protection
DK40i Secondary Protection
The following diagram (see Figure 3-23) shows where secondary protectors must be installed for
outside wiring.
Building #1
Building #2
HESB
PSTU/KSTU2
Standard
RSTU/RSTU2
Telephone
RDSU/RSTS
HDSS or
Electronic or
DDSS
DK40i Base
Digital Telephone
Console
KSU DKT
PEKU
Electronic or
PESU
Digital Telephone
PDKU
or Cordless Base
RDSU
HDCB
or DDCB
MDFB
DK40
i Installation
DDCB or
HDCB
MDFB
RBSU or TBSU
BRI U
NT-1
(Earth Ground)
REMU
E&M tie Line
TCOU, PCOU,
RCOU/RCOS
RGLU, RCIU/RCIS,
Ground/Loop
RBUU, RBUS, TBUU
CO Line
RDDU
DID Line
TDDU
DID Line
5239
Secondary protectors standard voltage
Secondary protectors low voltage
(Earth Ground)
Figure 3-24 DK40i Secondary Protector Diagram
Important!
To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors
must be installed if there is outside wiring, and on all DID and E&M Tie lines.
These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall
comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits,
UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a
reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6
line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and
test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of thee
manufacturer.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-41
DK40i Installation
MDF Wiring Diagrams
MDF Wiring Diagrams
Wiring diagrams for the DK40i (listed below) are shown in Figures 3-25~3-27.
MDF Wiring to KSU & Amphenol Station and Relay Connectors (KSTU2)
MDF Wiring to CO Lines and Digital Telephones (KCDU)
MDF Wiring to CO Lines (TCOU and TDDU)
See Chapter 10 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Diagrams for more information.
To Base Unit (P5)
Bridging
Station Cabling
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
W/Female Connector
Clips
24AWG (1 or 2 pair)
W-BL
26
(-) T1 (Voice/Data)
1
1
BL-W
1
(GND) R1 (Voice/Data)
2
2
T/R wires are always required;
W-O
27
(-) PT1 (Add, Power)
3
3
PT/PR are additional power wires
O-W
2
(GND) PR1 ((Add, Power)
4
4
required only for long station runs.
W-GN
28
T2
5
5
PT/PR may be used with normal
GN-W
3
R2
6
6
Circuit 2 to DKT24
station runs also).
W-BR
29
PT2
7
7
or PDIU-DS
BR-W
4
PR2
8
8
W-S
30
T3
9
9
S-W
5
R3
Circuit 3 to DKT3
10
10
R-BL
31
or PDIU-DS or
PT3
11
11
BL-R
6
DDCB
PR3
12
12
R-O
32
T4
13
13
O-R
7
R4
Circuit 4 TO DKT4
14
14
R-GN
33
PT4
or PDIU-DS or
15
15
R
GN
GN-R
8
DDCB
PR4
16
16
R1
T1
R-BR
34
T5
17
17
BK
Y
BR-R
9
R5
18
18
Circuit 5 or DKT5
PT1
PR1
R-S
35
PT5
19
19
or PDIU-DS
S-R
10
PR5
W
BL
20
20
RJ11
BK-BL
36
T6
21
21
BL-BK
11
R6
22
22
6 5 4 3 2 1
BK-O
37
Circuit 6 to DKT6
PT6
23
23
or PDIU-DS
O-BK
12
PR6
24
24
2 3 4 5
BK-GN
38
T7
25
25
GN-BK
13
R7
PR TR PT
GND
(-)
GND
(-)
26
26
Circuit 7 to DKT7
BK-BR
39
PT7
Modular
PR
T
R
PT
27
27
or PDIU-DS
BR-BK
14
PR7
Cord
28
28
BK-S
40
T8
29
29
S-BK
15
25-Pair Cable with Male Amp Connector
R8
30
30
Circuit 8 to DKT8
Y-BL
41
PT8
31
31
or PDIU-DS
Digital Telephone (DKT 1)
BL-Y
16
PR8
32
32
(With or without ADM,
Y-O
42
RPCI-DI)
33
33
Relay
O-Y
17
34
34
Contacts
Y-GN
43
35
35
Not Used
GN-Y
18
36
36
Y-BR
44
R1
37
37
STD TEL
BR-Y
19
T1
38
38
Circuit 1
Y-S
45
39
39
S-Y
20
Not Used
40
40
V-BL
46
R2
41
41
STD TEL
BL-V
21
T2
Circuit 2
42
42
V-O
47
or BGM
43
43
KSTU2
O-V
22
Not Used
44
44
V-GN
48
R3
45
45
Voltage levels:
STD TEL
GN-V
23
T3
46
46
Circuit 3
T, PT = 26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC
V-BR
49
47
47
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)
BR-V
24
Not Used
48
48
(Reference to FG ground)
V-S
50
R4
49
49
STD TEL
S-V
25
T4
50
50
Circuit 4
1679
66M150 Split Block
Note
See Table 3-10 on Page 3-40 for loop limits.
Figure 3-25 MDF Wiring to KSU & Amphenol Station and Relay Connectors (KSTU2)
3-42
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK40i Installation
MDF Wiring Diagrams
TO
CO LINE CABLING
NETWORK
BRIDGING
CLIPS
T1
T1
1
1
R1
R1
2
2
T2
T2
3
3
R2
R2
4
4
5
5
R
GN
6
6
R1
T1
7
7
8
8
BK
Y
T2
9
9
R2
10
10
W
BL
11
11
12
12
13
13
6 5 4 3 2 1
KCDU
14
14
15
15
2 3 4 5
CO2 LED
CO1 LED
48
48
MODULAR
CORD
49
49
6
50
50
5 R2
5
4
4 R1
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK
3
3 T1
2
1-6
D
2 T2
1
K
CO1+2
40
NETWORK JACK: RJ14C
KCDU
MODULAR
i Installation
FIC: 02LS2
PIN-OUT
JACK
STATION CABLING
TO KCDU
BRIDGING
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR
CLIPS
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)
W-BL
26
(-) T1 (VOICE/DATA)
1
1
BL-W
1
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)
2
2
W-O
27
(-) PT1 (ADD, POWER)
3
3
O-W
2
(GND) PR1 (ADD. POWER)
4
4
W-GN
28
T2
5
5
GN-W
3
R2
6
6
R
GN
CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2
W-BR
29
PT2
7
7
OR PDIU-DS
R1
T1
BR-W
4
PR2
8
8
BK
Y
W-S
30
T3
9
9
PT1
PR1
S-W
5
R3
10
10
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3
R-BL
31
PT3
W
BL
11
11
OR PDIU-DS
RJ11
BL-R
6
PR3
12
12
R-O
32
T4
13
13
6 5 4 3 2 1
O-R
7
R4
14
14
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4
R-GN
33
PT4
15
15
OR PDIU-DS
GN-R
8
25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR
PR4
16
16
2- OR 4-WIRE
GND
(-)
GND
(-)
R-BR
34
17
17
MODULAR CORD
BR-R
9
TO RJ11 JACK
PR (5)
T (4)
R (3)
PT (2)
18
18
R-S
35
ON BOTTOM
19
19
OF PDIU-DI
V-BR
49
DIGITAL
47
47
NOT USED
BR-V
24
TELEPHONE
48
48
V-S
50
(WITH OR WITHOUT
49
49
S-V
25
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2) OR
50
50
PDIU-DS
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK
- or -
Notes
DDCB
1 Voltage levels:
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC
R, RP = 0.0 VDC (GND) (Reference to SG ground)
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating on
reserve power per Table 3-10. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.
3. ADMs and/or DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 4, DDCB can be connected to Circuit 1.
Figure 3-26 MDF Wiring to CO Lines and Digital Telephones (KCDU)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
3-43
DK40i Installation
MDF Wiring Diagrams
To
RJ14C/RJ11
Network
Bridging
Modular Jacks
DID
Clips
T1
T1
T1
or
Modular Cords
1
1
R1
R1
CO1
2
2
GN
Y
BL
T2
T2
3
3
DID
R2
R2
4
4
or CO4/TCIU4
T3
T3
5
5
2345
654321
R3
R3
6
6
R
BK
W
R
4
T4
T4
7
7
3
R4
R4
T
8
8
R1
6-1
9
9
DID
10
10
T2
or
DID
CO2
11
11
or CO3/TCIU3
12
12
GN
Y
BL
R
13
13
4
3
14
14
2345
T
6-1
15
15
654321
R
BK
W
16
16
DID
17
17
R2
or CO2/TCIU2
18
18
DID
19
19
T3
or
R
4
20
20
CO3
3
T
21
21
GN
Y
BL
6-1
22
22
23
23
2345
24
24
654321
DID
R
BK
W
25
25
or CO1/TCIU1
26
26
R3
R
27
27
4
DID
3
28
28
T4
T
or
6-1
29
29
CO4
30
30
GN
Y
BL
31
31
32
32
33
33
2345
654321
34
34
R
BK
W
35
35
R
4
36
36
R4
3
T
37
37
6-1
38
38
PFT
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
TCOU Only
43
43
TCOU
TDDU
44
44
45
45
Network Jack
RJ11
RJ11
46
46
FIC
02LS2
02RV2-T
47
47
Power Failure
48
48
Standard Telephone
49
49
1680
50
50
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK
Figure 3-27 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (TCOU and TDDU)
3-44
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
4
This chapter explains how to configure the Strata DK424 system. The system has a modular
design which enables it to support a number of station and CO line configurations. The main
component of the system is the common control unit (RCTU) Printed Circuit Board (PCB).
The focus of this chapter is a series of worksheets, providing a systematic procedure for
determining the system's size. The worksheets also provide space to record the hardware and
station devices that make up the system. Tables and example worksheets are included to assist you
in filling out the worksheets.
Important!
Prior to Release 4.0, Tie and DID lines used station ports. With Release 4.0 and
higher processors, these lines do not use station ports, allowing larger capacity
systems when Tie and DID lines are required.
System Configuration
DK424 Configur
Important!
System Configuration can be complex and time consuming. For best results:
Use DKQuote to provide easy, fast, automated configuration. See the DKQuote User Guide
for more information.
ation
If you do not have DKQuote, use the Worksheets in this chapter.
The DK424's main components are: the DK424 Base Cabinet (DKSUB424), DK424 Expansion
Cabinets (DKSUE424), and four system processors (RCTUA4, RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4,
and RCTUE3/F4). The processor used in the system depends on the features and number of
telephones and CO lines required. Each cabinet is shipped with its required Power Supply
(RPSU280); the same power supply used in DK280 cabinets.
See Chapter 4 DK424 Configuration for detailed information on installing RCTU PCBs.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-1
DK424 Configuration
System Configuration
Base Cabinet
The DK424 Base Cabinet provides two designated slots for the RCTU processor and six universal
slots for station, line, and feature PCBs. It provides six connectors for expanding the system to a
maximum of six Expansion Cabinets. It comes with a Motherboard Jumper Unit (MBJU) installed
between the R11 and RCTU slot on the front side of the backplane motherboard. The MBJU is
removed only when RCTUE/F is installed. MBJU is installed for all other DK Release 1~4 RCTU
processor PCBs.
Expansion Cabinets
Cabinet and Universal Slot Capacity: Up to six DK424 Expansion Cabinets can be connected to a
DK424 Base Cabinet. The number of DK424 Expansion Cabinets allowed depends on which
processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet.
The DK424 Expansion Cabinets support either six or eight universal slots, depending on which
processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet.
All Expansion Cabinets are six slot cabinets except DK424 Expansion Cabinets. DK424
Expansion Cabinets provide eight slots, but only when connected to a DK424 Base Cabinet
controlled by an RCTUE3/F3 processor with the MBJU removed.
No DK424 Expansion Cabinets are allowed when connected to the DK424 Base Cabinet with
an RCTUA processor installed.
One DK424 Expansion Cabinet provides six universal slots when connected to the DK424
Base Cabinet with an RCTUBA/BB processor installed.
Up to five DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots each, when connected to the
DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUC/D processor installed.
Up to six DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal slots each, when connected to a
DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUE/F processor installed.
Table 4-1 shows DK424 cabinet and slot capacities for Release 3 and 4 processors.
Table 4-1
DK424 Cabinet and Expansion Slot Capacities
Universal Slots allowed per...
Processor in DK424
DK424 Expansion
Base Cabinet1
Cabinets Allowed
Expansion
Base Cabinet
System
Cabinet
RCTUA
0
1~6
0
6
RCTUBA/BB
1
1~6
1~6
12
RCTUC/D
5
1~6
1~6
36
RCTUE/F
6
1~6
1~82
54
1. All cabinets are DK424.
2. Only the RCTUE/F processor allows up to eight universal slots in the DK424 Expansion Cabinet.
4-2
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
System Configuration
DK424 and DK280 Compatibility
DK424 cabinets replace DK280 cabinets in the DK product line structure. DK424 Expansion
Cabinets began shipping in June 1995 and DK424 Base Cabinets in February 1997. All old DK280
Release 1~3 processors and DK280 Base/Expansion Cabinets can be mixed with new DK424 Base
and Expansion Cabinets with the following criteria (see Tables 4-2 and 4-3):
Table 4-2
DK280 Base with DK280 and/or DK424 Expansion Cabinets
Universal Slots allowed per...
Processor in DK280 Base
Expansion Cabinets
Cabinet
Allowed
Expansion
Base Cabinet
System
Cabinet
RCTUA1, RCTUA3,
0
1~6
0
6
RCTUA4
RCTUB1, RCTUB2,
RCTUBA3/BB3 or
1
1~6
1~6
12
RCTUBA3/BB4
RCTUC/D2, RCTUC3/D3,
RCTUE3/F3
5
1~6
1~6
36
RCTUE3/F4
Table 4-3
DK424 Base with DK280 and/or DK424 Expansion Cabinets
Universal Slots allowed per...
Processor in DK424 Base
Expansion Cabinets
Cabinet
Allowed
Expansion
Base Cabinet
System
Cabinet
RCTUA1, RCTUA3,
0
1~6
0
6
RCTUA4
DK424 Configur
RCTUB1, RCTUB2,
RCTUBA3/BB3 or
1
1~6
1~6
12
RCTUBA3/BB4
RCTUC/D2, RCTUC3/D3,
5
1~6
1~6
36
RCTUC3/D4
ation
1~6 for DK280
Expansion
RCTUE3/F3
Cabinets
61
1~6
36~542
RCTUE3/F4
1~8 for DK424
Expansion
Cabinets
1. Last Expansion Cabinet must be a DK424.
2. Depends on the combination of Expansion Cabinets.
DK424 and DK280 Cabinets can be mixed in any combination, with one exception. If seven
cabinets are required, an RCTUE/F processor must be installed in a DK424 Base Cabinet and
the sixth Expansion Cabinet must be a DK424. In this case DK280 Expansion Cabinets
provide six universal slots and DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal slots.
DK280 and DK424 Base Cabinets provide six universal slots maximum in any configuration
and any RCTU processor can be installed.
DK280 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots maximum in any configuration.
DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots maximum in any configuration with a
DK280 Base Cabinet, including a DK280 Base Cabinet with an RCTUE/F processor.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-3
DK424 Configuration
System Configuration
DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal slots in one configuration only: when
connected to a DK424 Base Cabinet controlled by an RCTUE/F processor (MBJU jumper
must be removed - see installation for details). DK424 cabinets provide six universal slots in
all other configurations.
An RCTUE/F processor can be installed in a DK280 Base Cabinet. When an RCTUE/F
processor is installed in a DK280 Base, only five Expansion Cabinets (DK424 and/or DK280)
can be installed. These Expansion Cabinets provide only six universal slots.
All older DK280 Release 1~3 processors will function in the DK424 Base Cabinet. The
features available depend on the respective release and type of the RCTU. These processors
include RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, RCTUB2, RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUC1/D2 and
RCTUC3/D3.
When an older processor is installed in the DK424 Base Cabinet, the DK424 and DK280
Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots and the MBJU jumper must be installed -
see RCTU installation for details.
RCTUA in a DK424 Base allows no Expansion Cabinets.
RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB in a DK424 Base allows one DK424 or DK280 Expansion
Cabinet with six universal slots.
RCTUC/D in a DK424 Base allows up to five DK424 and DK280 Expansion Cabinets in
any combination. These Expansion Cabinets provide six universal slots.
Designated Speaker OCA, DIU Data, and T1 slots
DK424 systems require that PDKU2 PCBs that support Speaker Off-Hook-Call-Announce (OCA)
and PDIU-DS and RPCI-DI PCBs for data applications must be placed in the slots designated in
Tables 4-4 and 4-5.
Note
PDKU2s that support Handset OCA and RPCI TAPI-only can operate in any slot.
Additionally, to enable T1/DS-1 interface, the RDTU PCB(s) must be placed in certain slots, with
corresponding slots left vacant. (The operation of certain channels necessitates vacant slots.)
RDTU PCBs can be placed in the slots in bold type; the vacant slots are not in bold in the
following tables.
Example: for cabinet 1, if an RDTU is placed in slot 13 and you want to use RDTU channels
17~24, then slot 14 must be left vacant. If you installed a second RDTU, it would go into slot 15;
slot 16 must also be vacant if you want to use RDTU channels 17~24.
4-4
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
System Configuration
Table 4-4
DK424 or DK280 Base Cabinet with MBJU Removed
Cabinet
Total Universal
PDKU2 Data and Speaker
RDTU1/Vacant Slots
Slots
OCA Slots
No.2
Type
1
DK424 (base)
6
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
13/143
15/163
2
DK280
6
21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,
21/223
23/243
25/263
2
DK424
8
21, 22, 23, 24
21/223
23/243
25/274/265
3
DK280
6
31, 32
31/323
33/354/345
3
DK424
8
31, 32, 37, 38
31/323
33/354/345
37/383
4
DK280
6
41, 42
41/423
43/454/445
4
DK424
8
41, 42, 47, 48
41/423
43/454/445
47/483
5
DK280
6
51, 52
51/523
53/554/545
5
DK424
8
51, 52, 57, 58
51/523
53/554/545
57/583
6
DK280
6
61, 62
61/623
63/654/645
6
DK424
8
61, 62, 67, 68
61/623
63/654/645
67/683
7
DK280
6
Cannot be seventh cabinet
7
DK424
8
No Data & Spkr OCA
71/774/725
73/754/745
Table 4-5 pertains to a DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTU-A1, A3, A4, B2, BA3/BB3 or BA3/BB4,
C1/D2, C3/D3 or C3/D4 with MBJU or a DK280 Base Cabinet with RCTU-A1, A3, A4, B2, BA3/
BB3, BA3/BB4, C1/D2, C3/D3, C3/D4, E3/F3, E3/F4.
Table 4-5
DK424 or DK280 Base Cabinet with MBJU
DK424 Configur
Cabinet
Total Universal
PDKU2 Data and
RDTU1/Vacant Slots
Slots
Speaker OCA Slots
No.2
Type
1
DK424 or DK280 (base)
6
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
13/143
15/163
2
DK424 or DK280
6
21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26
21/223
23/243
25/263
at
3
DK280 or DK424
6
31, 32
31/323
33/354/345
ion
4
DK280 or DK424
6
41, 42
41/423
43/454/445
5
DK280 or DK424
6
51, 52
51/523
53/554/545
6
DK280 or DK424
6
61, 62
61/623
63/654/645
These footnotes apply to Tables 4-4 and 4-5:
1. RCTUA does not support RDTU.
2. RCTUB and RCTUBA/BB supports cabinets 1 and 2 only.
3. Slot must be vacant for RDTU channels 17-24 (2-slot RDTU positions).
4. Slot must be vacant for RDTU channels 9-16 (3-slot RDTU positions).
5. Slot must be vacant for RDTU channels 17-24 (3-slot RDTU positions).
DK280 to DK424 Upgrades
To upgrade an existing DK280 Base Cabinet to a DK424 Base Cabinet with an RCTUE/F
processor, see "DK280 to DK424 Base Cabinet Upgrade Considerations" on Page 5-52.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-5
DK424 Configuration
Features Capacities
Features Capacities
The features and capacities of DK424 system processors are provided in Tables 4-6~4-10.
Table 4-6
System Feature Capacities
DK424
Features
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Amplified Conferencing1
0
2
4
4
4
4
Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous
3
5
12
12
24
24
announcements
Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Abandoned Call Numbers:
10~100
10~100
10~100
10~100
10~100
10~100
stored per station
Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Abandoned Call Numbers:
200
200
200
400
1000
2000
stored per system
CO Line Groups
4
8
8
8
16
16
Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups
10
10
10
10
10
10
DH Groups
16
16
16
16
16
16
DH stations per Group
8
28
32
32
32
32
DNIS Network Routing Numbers
0
100
100
200
300
300
DNIS Numbers
0
200
200
350
500
500
DTMF receivers
3
5
12
12
24
24
External Page Zones
0
4
4
4
4
8
Call Park Orbits - general
20
20
20
20
20
20
Call Park Orbits - individual
10
28
32
80
240
336
Personal LCD Messages per DKT2
10
10
10
10
10
10
Personal Message DKTs
8
16
16
32
96
96
[PhDNs] per System
10
28
32
80
240
336
[PDNs] per System
10
28
32
80
240
336
Ring Tones
3
3
3
3
3
3
Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party)
2
3
3
7
7
14
Simultaneous Two-CO Line conferencing
2
4
4
10
10
20
(3-party)
Station Speed Dial
40
40
40
40
40
40
Stratagy DK Systems (per tenant group)
1
1
1
1
1
1
Stratagy DK Systems (per system)
0
2
2
2
4
4
System LCD Messages
40
40
40
40
40
40
System Speed Dial
40
40
40
100
100
800
Telephone Page Groups
5
5
5
5
9
9
Telephone Group Page simultaneous stations
8
28
32
80
120
120
paged
Telephone Pickup Groups
8
20
20
20
20
20
Tenants
2
2
2
4
4
4
Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table
8
8
8
8
16
16
Toll Restriction Classes
4
4
4
4
8
8
Verified Account Codes
300
300
300
300
300
500
Voice Mail SMDI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1. Requires additional customer-supplied hardware.
2. Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo.
4-6
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Features Capacities
Table 4-7
Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots
DK424
Lines and PCB Slots
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Universal slots
0
41
6
12
36
54
CO lines loop start
4
122
162
482
1442
2002
CO lines ground start
0
12
162
402
1362
2002
DID lines (analog)
0
12
163
403
1363
2003
Tie lines (analog)
0
12
163
403
1363
2003
T1 (DS-1) lines each)
0
0
0
484
1444
1924
ISDN BRI (S/T or U) B channel lines
0
12
85
165
165
165
ISDN PRI (T) B channel lines
0
0
0
476
1416
1886
Squared System Maximum
4 lines +
12 lines +
16 lines +
48 lines +
144 lines +
200 lines +
(lines + stations)
4 stations
12 stations
16 stations
48 stations
144 stations
200 stations
1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit.
2. All CO line capacities assume a PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, or RSIU is installed for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/
F, but no Caller ID RCIU2/RCIS PCBs.
3. Limits apply to analog DID and Tie lines, not T1 DID/Tie lines.
4. T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination).
5. BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL).
6. PRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, ANI, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIL.
Table 4-8
Station and Peripherals Capacities
DK424
Stations
DK14
DK40i
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
DK424 Configur
Add-on modules (DADM)
8
12
12
40
120
200
Attendant consoles
0
0
0
2
4
4
DKT 2004-CT Cordless Telephones
8
28
32
80
240
336
DKT 2004-CT simultaneous calls
8
9
9
9
9
9
Door locks
2
3
4
5
5
5
Door phones (MDFB)
6
9
9
12
12
12
ation
DSS consoles
0
3
3
4
8
8
ISDN BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA
0
10
8
16
40
64
(2B+D per circuit)1
Handset OCA stations
8
28
32
80
240
336
Off-premise stations
2
20
32
80
232
328
PDIU-DS2
7
24
31
79
160
208
RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI, per system2
8
24
32
80
144
200
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only: per cabinet2
N/A
N/A
32
40
40
40
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only: per system2
8
24
32
80
186
280
Speaker OCA stations
8
28
32
80
160
208
Standard stations
2
20
24
72
232
328
Telephones DKT
8
283
324
804
2404
3364
Telephones EKT
0
163
324
804
2404
3284
1. ISDN BRI TE-1 and TA include ISDN telephones, modems, video conference interfaces, etc. Up to two stations (TE-1 and/or
TA) can connect to and share one BRI S-type circuit. Only one station can connect to a BRI U-type circuit.
2. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits.
3. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs in the DK40i, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the
stations must be DKTs.
4. Maximum capacity of DKT/EKT stations per DK424 cabinet is 62, less for EKT 2000, 3000 (Power Factor limitation).
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-7
DK424 Configuration
Features Capacities
System Capacity
The number of CO lines and stations needed determine the size of the system. Tables 4-9 and 4-12
show the station and line capacities for eight-port RCOU/RCOS CO line PCBs.
There is a trade-off between stations and lines. Every group of eight stations installed decreases the
CO line capacity of the system by eight, and vice versa. The exact hardware requirements depend
on the features required.
Tables 4-9~4-12 assume one cabinet slot is used for an Optional Interface PCB.
Table 4-9
Strata DK424 Expansion Cabinet Configuration for Eight-Port CO Line PCBs Without Caller ID
2 Cabinets
1 Cabinet
3 Cabinets
4 Cabinets
5 Cabinets
6 Cabinets
7 Cabinets
RCTUB or
RCTUA
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
RCTUBA/BB
CO Lines Stations CO Lines Stations CO Lines Stations CO Lines Stations CO Lines Stations CO Lines Stations CO Lines Stations
16
32
48
40
72
64
96
88
120
112
144
136
200
224
44
40
68
64
92
88
116
112
140
136
196
224
40
48
64
72
88
96
112
120
136
144
192
232
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
132
144
188
232
32
56
56
80
80
104
104
128
128
152
184
240
28
56
52
80
76
104
100
128
124
152
180
240
24
64
48
88
72
112
96
136
120
160
176
248
20
64
44
88
68
112
92
136
116
160
172
248
16
72
40
96
64
120
88
144
112
168
168
256
12
72
36
96
60
120
84
144
108
168
164
256
8
80
32
104
56
128
80
152
104
176
160
264
28
104
52
128
76
152
100
176
156
264
24
112
48
136
72
160
96
184
152
272
20
112
44
136
68
160
92
184
148
272
40
144
64
168
88
192
144
280
36
144
60
168
84
192
140
280
32
152
56
176
80
200
136
288
28
152
52
176
76
200
132
288
24
160
48
184
72
208
128
296
44
184
68
208
124
296
40
192
64
216
120
304
36
192
60
216
116
304
32
200
56
224
112
312
52
224
108
312
48
232
104
320
44
232
100
320
40
240
96
328
92
328
88
336
84
336
4-8
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Features Capacities
Table 4-10
CO Loop Start Analog Lines with Caller ID Maximum Capacities
1 Cabinet
2 Cabinets
3 Cabinets
4 Cabinets
5 Cabinets
6 Cabinets
7 Cabinets
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
8
24
24
40
40
56
56
72
72
88
88
104
136
152
16
56
32
72
48
88
64
104
80
120
128
168
8
72
24
88
40
104
56
120
72
136
120
184
16
104
32
120
48
136
64
152
3112
200
24
136
40
152
56
168
104
216
32
168
48
184
96
232
40
200
88
248
80
264
Table 4-11
CO Ground Start with Caller ID, DID and/or Tie Analog Lines Maximum Combined Capacities
1 Cabinet
2 Cabinets
3 Cabinets
4 Cabinets
5 Cabinets
6 Cabinets
7 Cabinets
RCTUA
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
8
16
20
24
32
40
44
48
56
64
68
72
104
112
16
40
28
48
40
64
52
72
64
88
100
120
8
64
24
64
36
72
48
88
60
96
96
136
16
88
32
88
44
96
56
112
92
144
12
96
28
96
40
112
52
120
88
160
24
112
36
120
48
136
84
168
20
120
32
136
44
144
80
184
16
136
28
144
40
160
76
192
24
160
36
168
72
208
32
184
68
216
28
192
64
232
DK424 Configur
60
240
56
256
Table 4-12
Digital, Tie, DID, Ground/Loop Start Digital T1 and ISDN PRI Lines Maximum Combined
Capacities
at
2 Cabinets
3 Cabinets
4 Cabinets
5 Cabinets
6 Cabinets
7 Cabinets
ion
RCTUBA/BB
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
Lines
Stations
48
56
72
88
112
112
120
152
144
144
1921
240
40
64
64
96
96
120
112
160
120
168
184
248
24
72
48
104
88
128
96
168
112
176
168
264
16
80
40
112
72
136
88
176
96
192
160
272
24
120
64
144
72
184
88
200
144
288
16
128
48
152
64
192
72
216
136
296
40
160
48
200
64
224
120
312
24
168
40
208
48
240
112
320
16
176
24
216
--
--
96
336
1. The maximum number of PRI lines for 2 cabinets is 47, 3~6 cabinets is 141 and 7 cabinets is 188.
Notes
T1 Lines can be in increments of 8, 16 and/or 24.
PRI channels can be in increments of 23B+1D or 47B+1D. Each B channel represents a PRI
CO line.
Tables 4-13~4-18 show system maximum capacity examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U)
circuits.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-9
DK424 Configuration
Features Capacities
Table 4-13
RCTUA Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
BRI Station
Other Station
BRI Line
BRI Line
Other Line
Circuits1
B channels1
Circuits3
Circuits4
B channels4
Circuits5
82
162
16
0
0
0
6
12
16
2
4
0
5
10
16
3
6
0
4
8
16
42
82
0
4
8
16
2
4
4
3
6
16
1
2
8
2
4
24
2
4
8
1
2
28
1
2
12
Table 4-14
RCTUBA/BB Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
BRI Station
Other Station
BRI Line
BRI Line
Other Line
Circuits1
B channels1
Circuits3
Circuits4
B channels4
Circuits5
162
322
32
82
162
0
12
24
40
8
16
8
10
20
40
8
16
12
8
16
48
8
16
16
8
16
48
6
12
20
8
16
56
4
8
24
8
16
56
2
4
28
6
12
56
6
12
24
6
12
56
4
8
28
6
12
64
2
4
32
4
8
64
4
8
32
4
8
64
2
4
32
2
4
72
2
4
40
1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system capacity by two
station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to eight TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B
channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit). Each BRI-U circuit supports one TE-1 or TA device.
2. Maximum BRI capacity.
3. Conventional stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard telephones and
devices.
4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/RBUS PCBs. ISDN
BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI line circuit (S/T or U) provides two BRI CO
lines (channels) for incoming/outgoing calls.
5. Conventional lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines.
4-10
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Features Capacities
Table 4-15
RCTUC/D Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
BRI Station
Other Station
BRI Line
BRI Line
Other Line
Circuits1
B channels1
Circuits3
Circuits4
B channels4
Circuits5
402
802
144
82
162
48
30
60
164
8
16
68
20
40
184
8
16
88
16
32
192
8
16
96
12
24
200
8
16
104
8
16
208
8
16
112
8
16
216
4
8
120
8
16
216
2
4
124
4
8
228
2
4
132
Table 4-16
RCTUE/F Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
BRI Station
Other Station
BRI Line
BRI Line
Other Line
Circuits1
B channels1
Circuits3
Circuits4
B channels4
Circuits5
642
1282
192
8 2
16 2
56
50
100
216
8
16
84
40
80
240
8
16
104
30
60
256
8
16
124
20
40
280
8
16
144
16
32
288
8
16
152
8
16
304
8
16
168
DK424 Configur
8
16
312
4
8
176
8
16
312
2
4
180
4
8
320
4
8
184
4
8
320
2
4
188
at
2
4
328
2
4
192
ion
1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system capacity by two
station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to eight TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B
channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit). Each BRI-U circuit supports one TE-1 or TA device.
2. Maximum BRI capacity.
3. Conventional stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard telephones and
devices.
4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/RBUS PCBs. ISDN
BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI line circuit (S/T or U) provides two BRI CO
lines (channels) for incoming/outgoing calls.
5. Conventional lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-11
DK424 Configuration
Printed Circuit Boards
Printed Circuit Boards
The system interfaces with CO lines, stations, and peripheral devices via PCBs that plug into the
Base and Expansion Cabinet slots and subassembly PCBs, that mount onto the plug-in type PCBs.
Refer to Table 4-17 for a list of station and console PCBs supported by the DK424.
Table 4-17
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors
PCB
Subassembly
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
POTS
FX
(DK424 only)
Tie (senderized)
RJ48C or RJ48X
RPTU
1 circuit/ISDN PRI
Tie (cut through)
ISDN TIA-568A
(23 B channels/1 D channel)
OUTWATS (intra-LATA)
OUTWATS (inter-LATA)
InWATS
2 ISDN BRI S/T point circuits
RBSU
(NT or TE). Each circuit is
Network and/or station side
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
2B+1D. (Host for the RBSS)
Station side only
attaches to
2 ISDN BRI, S point circuits
RBSS
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
RBSU
(2B+D each)
1 RBSS subassembly per
RBSU
(DK424 only) 2 ISDN BRI, U
RBUU
point circuits (2B+D each).
Network and/or station side
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
Host for the RBUS. (R4.3)
2 ISDN BRI, U point circuits
Network and/or station side
attaches to
RBUS
(2B+D each) subassembly for
RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
RBUU
1 RBUS subassembly per
the RBUU. (R4.3)
RBUU.
Loop start lines
Applies to DK424 only.
2-pair amphenol
Ground start lines
RJ48M
RDTU2
1~8, 1~16, or 1~24 channels
Tie lines (wink or immediate)
(All PCB amphenol
(lines), depends on system
connectors are
programming
DID/DOD lines (wink or
female)
immediate)
2 E911 CAMA circuits with the
RMCU
E911 CAMA lines
1 RCMS or 4 with 2 RCMSs
RJ11C modular
attaches to
Up to 2 RCMSs per RMCU for
RCMS
2 E911 CAMA circuits
RMCU
4 CAMA lines max.
E&M Tie lines
2- or 4-wire transmission
Type I signaling
REMU (8-wire
REMU
4 Tie line circuits
modular jack)
Type II signaling
2- or 4-wire/type I or II
Immediate start
Wink start
(DK40i only)
CO loop start lines
RJ14C modular (CO
Line circuits)
KCDU
2 CO line circuits/
Digital circuits same as PDKU,
25-pair amphenol
4 digital telephone circuits
except no DDSS
(digital phone circuits)
4-12
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Printed Circuit Boards
Table 4-17
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued)
PCB
Subassembly
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
4 CO line circuits (lines)
RCOU
With RCOS:
CO loop start lines
8 CO line circuits (lines)
RJ14C modular
attaches to
Provides four additional Loop 1 RCOS subassembly per
RCOS
RCOU
Start CO lines.
RCOU
4 circuits
Loop or Ground Start Lines
RCIU2
with Caller ID. Requires:
With RCIS: 8 circuits
RCOU, RGLU2 or PCOU
RJ14C modular
Used with RCOU/RCOS,
attaches to
PCOU, and RGLU2 CO line
1 RCIS subassembly per
RCIS
RCIU2
PCBs to provide 4 Caller ID
RCIU2
circuits.
RDDU
4 DID circuits
DID Lines
RJ14C modular
RGLU2
4 line circuits
Loop or ground start lines
RJ14C modular
25-pair amphenol
ACD/SMIS (DK424 only,
(PIOU or PEPU)
except RCTUA)
Spring clip terminal
PIOU,
SMDI for Voice Mail
(PIOUS)
PIOUS,
A PIOU or PIOUS can use an
Two 3-pair modular
PEPU,
IMDU
SMDR printer or call
(TTY/SMDR/SMDI/
RSSU
accounting machine
SMIS)
PC or maintenance terminal
(All PCB amphenol
(local or remote)
connectors are
female)
Provides remote maintenance
attaches to
DK424 Configur
300 bps or 1200 bps full-duplex
PIOU and
IMDU
None
modem for DKi Admin or DKi
PIOUS
Backup. 1 per PIOU/PIOUS.
Standard telephones
Voice mail ports
Off-premises stations
ation
Other similar devices
Alternate BGM source
25-pair amphenol
Auto Attendant digital
RSTU2
8 standard telephone circuits
(All PCB amphenol
announcer
connectors are
Message Waiting lamp (RSTU2
female)
only)
Fax machines
ACD Announcer
Strata AirLink wireless
telephones
Optionally interfaces to the
attaches to
RSTU2 and RDSU to extend
48VDC circuit for up to 8
RSTU2
R48S
loop length of standard
None
standard telephone circuits
and RDSU
telephones from 600 ohms to
1200 ohms.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-13
DK424 Configuration
Printed Circuit Boards
Table 4-17
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued)
PCB
Subassembly
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
Without RSTS:
Digital: same as PDKU, except
2 standard telephone/
no DDSS console
4 digital telephone circuits
RDSU
Standard: same as RSTU
25-pair amphenol
With RSTS:
(standard Message Waiting not
4 standard telephone/
available)
4 digital telephone circuits
attaches to
Provides two additional
RSTU2
RSTS
1 maximum per RDSU
None
standard telephone circuits
and RDSU
2 standard telephone circuits/
Standard: same as KSTU2
4 electronic telephone circuits
PESU
Electronic: same as PEKU,
25-pair amphenol
(standard/electronic
except PESU does not support
telephone ports)
HDSS console
(DK424 only)
PC attendant console
RATU
4 PC attendant PC console
Conventional attendant
25-pair amphenol
circuits
console
Digital telephones (with or
without RPCI-DI, DVSU,
DADMs, or digital cordless
telephone)
PDKU2
8 digital telephone circuits
Stand-alone digital cordless
25-pair amphenol
telephone
DDSS console
PDIU-DS
DDCB
2, 4, 6, or 8 VM ports
Stratagy
All of the above Stratagy DK
None
None
DK
systems use 8 station ports in
the DK40i and DK424
software
Electronic telephones
HDSS console
25-pair amphenol
Alternate BGM source
PEKU
8 electronic telephone circuits
(All PCB amphenol
EOCU PCB for OCA
connectors are
Female)
External conference amplifier
HDCB
Provides Speaker OCA path
attaches to
for 8 circuits on PEKU or 4
1 for PEKU or PESU that
PEKU or
EOCU
circuits on PESU. (Handset
supports Speaker OCA
PESU
OCA is not available on
EKTs.)
ACD/SMIS
Up to 4 interface ports when
SMDI for voice mail
RSIU
One 3-pair modular
installed with the optional
SMDR printer or call
(DK424
(TTY/SMDR/SMDI/
RSIS or RMDS piggy-back
only)
accounting machine
SMIS)
PCBs.
PC or maintenance terminal
(local or remote)
4-14
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Printed Circuit Boards
Table 4-17
PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (continued)
PCB
Subassembly
Circuits
Interface Options
Connector
Provides up to four interface
ports (RS-232 and modem) for
system interface with:
RSIS, RS-232
interface
Up to 3 RSISs
RMDS (1200 or 2400 bps)
...or
One 3-pair modular
attaches to
Voice Mail SMDI
per RSIS (RS-232),
RMDS
RSIU
RMDS (Modem/RS-
(Modem/
ACD/SMIS
1 RMDS and
232)
RS-232)
2 RSISs per RSIU
SMDR
(DK424 only)
Local or Remote Maintenance
for DKi Admin or DKi Backup
PC.
Digital Wireless Handsets:
4 RJ11 jacks to support 4
same as PDKU, except no
RWIU
Strata AirLink Integrated Base DDSS console, Stand-alone
None
Stations
cordless telephone, PDIU-DS,
or DDCB
DK424 Configur
ation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-15
DK424 Configuration
Printed Circuit Boards
RKYS Feature Key Upgrades
The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Software
Management Information System (SMIS) for ACD with feature keys that attach to the common
control unit. See Table 4-18 for a list of features provided by RKYS feature keys.
Table 4-18
RKYS Features
Feature(s) Provided
RKYS1
RKYS2
RKYS3
Common Control Unit
Built-in Auto Attendant
X
X
X
Applies to all RCTUs
ACD
X
X
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
ACD with a SMIS application
X
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
Option Interface PCBs for the DK424 are listed in Table 4-19. Refer to Chapter 12 Peripherals
for further information on these options.
Table 4-19
DK424 Interface PCB Options
RSIU/
Interface Options
RSSU1
PIOU1
PIOUS1
PEPU
RSIS1
Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones)
X
Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohms, duplex)
X
X
X
Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms)
X
X
Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay
X
X
X
Door lock or external amplifier control relay
X
X
X
Alarm Sensor
X
X
Remote maintenance modem subassembly (IMDU or RMDS)
X
X
X
(disables TTY output when they are piggy-backed onto the PIOU/
(IMDU)
(IMDU)
(IMDU)
PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS cards)2
Remote Maintenance using customer-provided external modem
(requires TTY output port)2
X
X
X
X
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)
X3
X3
X
MIS for ACD (requires TTY output port)2, 4
X
X
X
X
Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)2
X
X
X
X
StrataControl and/or DKi Admin PC (requires TTY output port)2
X
X
X
X
1. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU each provide one TTY port which can be flexibly programmed for the features marked with X.
RSIU/RSIS can provide up to four flexible TTY/SMDR ports.
2. Maintenance modem, ACD/SMIS, Insight DK, Voice Mail, SMDI and DKi Admin PC Interface each require a separate TTY
output. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU provide one TTY output each. RSIU with RSIS PCBs provides up to four TTY outputs.
3. SMDR output will function simultaneously on the same PIOU or PIOUS with one of the following: DKi Admin, remote
modem, SMIS for ACD, Insight DK, or SMDI features.
4. Insight DK, Call Center Viewer and SMIS for ACD requires that the system processor (RCTU PCB) must be equipped with an
RKYS3 or higher feature key.
4-16
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Telephones
Telephones
The DK424 system supports Toshiba Proprietary Digital (DKT) and older series Electronic
Telephones (EKTs). Standard telephones (500 or 2500 series) and devices that require a standard
telephone line interface (fax, modem, VM, etc.) can also be connected to DK424.
Toshiba provides the following 2000-series Digital Telephones for Strata DK424 systems.
DKT-2020SD20-button speakerphone with LCD
DKT-2010SD10-button speakerphone with LCD
DKT-2020S20-button speakerphone
DKT-2010S10-button speakerphone
Toshiba telephones can be equipped with optional subassemblies (listed on Page 4-33).
Attendant Position Options
The DK424 provides three options for attendant positions which answer system incoming calls.
See Table 4-9 for the number of options per RCTU processor. See Table 4-20 for configuration
considerations.
PC Attendant Consoleused for medium-to-heavy traffic systems where an attendant must
answer and transfer incoming calls. The PC Attendant Console requires a customer-provided
PC plus the RATU PCB.
Up to two consoles can be connected on systems with RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB or four with
RCTUC/D (Release 2 and 3) and RCTUE/F PCBs. The RATU PCB uses four station ports in
system software. RCTUC/D Release 1 and all RCTUAs do not support the attendant console.
DK424 Configur
Direct Station Select (DSS) Consoleused for medium traffic systems where an attendant
must answer and transfer incoming calls. The DSS console must connect to circuit 8 on a
PDKU PCB.
Digital Add-On-Module (DADM)used for medium traffic, smaller systems, where an
at
Attendant must answer and transfer incoming calls. The ADM connects to any 2000-series
ion
digital telephone. The DADM shares the associated telephones circuit so it does not require a
designated PCB or circuit port (see "DADM" on Page 4-33.)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-17
DK424 Configuration
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles and Door Phones (MDFBs)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles and Door
Phones (MDFBs)
Up to 12 door phones can be installed in a system with DK424 RCTUB, RCTUC/D and
RCTUE/F, nine with RCTUA. Each is connected to a DDCB or HDCB door phone control box.
See Table 4-20 for door phone configuration considerations.
Table 4-20
DSS Console and Door Phone Configuration
Option
Interface
DK424/DK424i Capacity
Function
Unit
/PCB
3-RCTUA
Digital DSS console (DDSS) can be flexibly assigned to designated
PDKU2
4-RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
electronic and digital telephone stations: Up to 8-DSS consoles may be
DDSS
(Circuit
8-RCTUC/D,
assigned to a designated electronic or digital telephone station.
8)
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
It has 60-buttons which are flexibly assigned as CO line, speed dial, and
8-RCTUE/F
DSS (no [PDN] or [PhDN]).
3-RCTUA
Electronic DSS console (HDSS) provides a 60-button console that
functions with digital or electronic telephones. Buttons are flexibly
PEKU
4-RCTUBA/BB, B1CU
assigned as CO line, speed dial, and DSS (no [PDN] or [PhDN]).
HDSS
(Circuits
8-RCTUC/D,
7 and 8)
DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned to designated electronic and
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
digital telephone stations: Up to 8-DSS consoles may be assigned to a
8-RCTUE/F
designated electronic or digital telephone station.
Each Digital Door Phone/Lock control (DDCB) interfaces with up to three
door phones (MDFBs) or two MDFBs and one door lock.
PDKU or
4 per system: RCTUBA/BB,
DDCBs/HDCBs can only be connected to Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028,
RDSU
RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, B1CU,
DDCB
normally in slots 11, 12, 13, and 14, respectively.
(Circuit
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
5)
3 per system: RCTUA
Always install DDCB/HDCB station PCBs (PDKU, RDSU, PEKU, or
PESU) in slots that have lower slot numbers than RDDU, PEMU,
REMU2, RATU, or RDTU PCBs.
Each Electronic Door Phone/Lock control (HDCB) provides interface for
4 per system: RCTUBA/BB
up to three door phones (MDFBs) or two MDFBs and one door lock.
PEKU or
and RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F,
DDCBs/HDCBs can only be connected to Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028,
PESU
HDCB
B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/
normally in slots 11, 12, 13, and 14, respectively.
(Circuit
BU, B5CAU/BU
5)
Always install DDCB/HDCB station PCBs (PDKU, RDSU, PEKU, or
3 per system: RCTUA
PESU) in slots that have lower slot numbers than RDDU, PEMU,
REMU2, RATU, or RDTU PCBs.
12 per system: RCTUBA/BB,
MDFB
RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, B1CU,
Door phone (MDFB) with two-way talk path to system telephones.
DDCB or
(Door
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU,
Includes microphone for talkback amplifier with HESB.
HDCB
Phone)
B5CAU/BU
Doorbell rings designated digital and electronic telephones.
9 per system: RCTUA
Notes
DSS (DDSS and HDSS) Console
No additional hardware is required for DSS consoles.
DSS consoles are assigned to associated digital and electronic telephones in programming.
DSS consoles cannot be connected to RDSU or PESU electronic circuits.
Door Phone
DK424 can support as many as 12 MDFBs. See Table 4-9.
Each DDCB requires one circuit (Circuit 5) on a PDKU or RDSU, and each HDCB requires one circuit (Circuit
5) on either a PEKU or PESU.
One door lock control can be configured on each DDCB and HDCB in place of one door phone.
4-18
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
AC and Reserve Power Hardware
AC and Reserve Power Hardware
Detailed information for AC and reserve battery power installation is described in Chapter 5
DK424 Cabinet Installation. These optional assemblies may be required, see Table 4-21.
RBTC1A-2M and PBTC-3MBattery connecting cables.
RC7C1A-1.7MSeventh cabinet battery and data cable kit.
RBDB2Battery power distribution box for up to seven cabinets.
RPSB1 and RPSB2three-outlet AC power strips, for requirements.
Table 4-21
Power Strip (RPSB) Requirements
Quantity of RPSB1 and RPSB2 Power Strips Needed1
Local Electric Code
1 Cabinet
2 Cabinets
3 Cabinets
4 Cabinets
5 Cabinets
6 Cabinets
7 Cabinets
Requirement
Two AC power cords
0 - RPSB1
0 - RPSB1
1 - RPSB1
1 - RPSB1
2 - RPSB1
2 - RPSB1
2 - RPSB1
allowed from system.
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
1 - RPSB2
Only one AC power
0 - RPSB1
1 - RPSB1
1 - RPSB1
1 - RPSB1
1 - RPSB1
2 - RPSB1
cord allowed from
N/A
system.
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
0 - RPSB2
1 - RPSB2
1 - RPSB2
1 - RPSB2
1. High current carrying capacity cord for application where local electric codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or
more cabinets. Toshiba highly recommends using the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations.
Floor Mount Installation Hardware
DK424 Configur
Floor mounting DK424 requires RFIF and RCCB hardware assemblies; wall mounting DK424
does not require special hardware (see Table 4-22), but may require a plywood backboard (see
Chapter 5 DK424 Installation).
Table 4-22
Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies
at
Assembly
Description
Function
ion
Two cables are required for up to six cabinet systems and three are
required for seven cabinet reserve power installations (for current carrying
Reserve Power Cable capacity) when connecting reserve (battery) power to three or more
RBTC1A-2M
- RBDB2 to Battery
cabinets (wall mount). RBDB2 is also requiredsee "RBDB2" below.
Terminals
A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local
electrical code compliance.
Reserve Power Cable One cable is required for each Cabinet if connecting reserve power to one
- Cabinet Power
or two cabinets (wall or table mount).
PBTC-3M
Supply to Battery
A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local
Terminals
electrical code compliance.
Distributes reserve power when three or more cabinets require reserve
power (floor or wall mount).
Battery Distribution
RBDB2
Box
Six RBTC2A-1.5M cables are provided with the RBDB2 distribution box to
connect up to six DK424 power supplies to the battery distribution box.
RC7C1A-1.7M is also required for the seventh cabinet.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-19
DK424 Configuration
Worksheets
Table 4-22
Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies (continued)
Assembly
Description
Function
Used for seven cabinet installations only. Provides long data cable to
Cabinet 7 Cable Kit -
connect the sixth Expansion Cabinet to the DK424 Base Cabinet.
RC7C1A-1.7M
Data and Battery
Provides a long battery cable to connect RBDB2 battery distribution box to
Cables
the sixth Expansion Cabinet power supply.
Provides two metal stands for mounting three or more cabinets on floor.
RFIF
Floor Mount Fixture
Three pairs of wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with RFIF. Wall brackets
(up to 7
Kit
are needed to secure floor mounted systems to the wall for safety
cabinets)
purposes (not required to wall mount cabinets).
Conduit box required for AC and battery power connection to three or
RCCB1
more floor-mounted cabinets. (Not required for mounting two cabinets on
(up to 6
a table or any number of cabinets on a wall.)
Conduit Connection
cabinets)
RCCB2 is required instead of RCCB1 for seven cabinet floor mount
Box
...or RCCB2
installations.
(7 cabinets)
A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local
electrical code compliance.
One RPSB1 required when installing three or four cabinets (wall or floor
Three-outlet AC
mount).
RPSB1
Power Strip
Two RPSB1s required when installing five, six, or seven cabinets (wall or
floor mount). Two AC cords will exit the cabinets in some configurations.
High current carrying capacity cord for application where local electric
Three-outlet AC
codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets. It
RPSB2
Power Strip - heavy
is highly recommended to use the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations to
cord
accommodate further growth. Must be ordered for seven cabinet systems.
Required for seven cabinet systems when the system is floor mounted.
RWBF
Wall bracket pair
Secures the seventh cabinet to the wall for safety purposes (not required
to wall mount cabinets see RFIF).
Worksheets
The worksheets help you configure the system. Designed to make the system configuration as
orderly as possible, they also provide room to record the hardware - cabinets, PCBs, stations, and
options - that comprise the system.
Copy the worksheets as required, then fill them out in the order they are given.
Worksheet 1 System PCB Slot Requirements
Worksheet 2 System Cabinet Assignment Guide
Worksheet 3 System PCB Assignment Guide
Worksheet 4 Option Configuration Guide
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor (PF) Check
4-20
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
Customer
Location
Digital Ports Required
Digital Telephones (DKTs)
2010-H
2010-SD
2020-S
2020-SD
2004-CT
2001-SLT
WRLS-HS
1020-H
1020-SD
Total Digital Telephones (DKTs)
1 port per Digital Telephone (1 X Total)
Total DDSS Consoles
1 port per Digital DDSS Console (1 X Total)
Total PDIU-DS
1 port per Digital PDIU-DS (1 X Total)
Total Digital door Phone/
1 port per Digital DDCB (1 X Total)
Lock Units (DDCB)
DK424 Configur
Total Digital Ports
Notes
Digital telephones equipped with RPCI-DI, PDIU-D12 or ADM only require one digital port. (See Table 4-10.)
One door phone control box (DDCB) supports three door phones (MDFBs). (See Table 4-20.)
WRLS-HS is the same part number for Digital or Analog (depends on the type installed).
ation
Electronic Ports Required
Electronic Telephones (EKTs)
6510-S
6510-H
6520-S
6520-SD
Total Electronic Telephones (EKTs)
1 port per Electronic Telephone (1 X Total)
Total HDSS Consoles
2 ports per HDSS Console (2 X Total)
Total Electronic Door Phone/Lock Unit
1 port per HDCB (1 X Total)
(HDCB)
Total BGM Source Extend Amplifiers
2 ports per amplifier (2 X Total)
Total Alternate BGM Source
1 port per Alternate BGM Source (1 X Total)
Total Electronic Ports
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-21
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
Standard Ports Required
Standard Telephones
On Premise
Off Premise
Total Standard Telephones
1 port per Standard Telephone (1 X Total)
Total Analog Wireless Handsets
1 port per Analog Wireless Handset (1 X Total)
Total Voice Mail Ports
1 port per Voice Mail Port (1 X Total)
Total Fax or Modem Devices
1 port per fax/modem device (1 X Total)
Total ACD/Auto Attendant Digital
1 port per device (1 X Total)
Announcement Devices
Total Alternate BGM Source
1 port per Alternate BGM Source (1 X Total)
Total Other Devices
1 port per device (1 X Total)
Total Standard Ports
Notes
Isolation transformer may be required for the Alternate BGM Source, see Chapter 12 Peripheral
Installation.
Other devices include dictation equipment, etc.
4-22
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
Station PCBs/Slots Required
1.
Total digital ports divided by 8 (round up) =
Total PDKU2 PCB slots required
Notes
PDKU2 provides eight digital telephone ports (circuits). Circuit 5 (when associated with ports
004, 012, 020, and 028) can only interface with a DDCB. Circuit 8 can only interface with a
DDSS console (see Page 4-18).
The PDKU1 can also be used. The PDKU1 can only support Data Interface Units (DIUs) on
circuits 1~7, while the PDKU2 can support DIUs on all eight circuits. See Table 4-20 (example)
for slot limitations.
2. Total standard ports divided by 8 (round up) =
Total RSTU2 PCB slots required
Notes
The PSTU2 or PSTU1 can also be used. These earlier version PCBs can interface with the
same devices that the RSTU can, but they have different ring generators and cannot support
MW. See the RSTU/PSTU section in Chapter 9 Universal Slot PCBs for more details.
The RSTU2 provides eight standard telephone ports (circuits). Circuit 2 only can connect to a
separate Background Music (BGM) source. The RSTU can be equipped with an R48S to
extend the loop length of the RSTU from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms (see Table 4-17).
RSTU2 is required to operate message waiting lamps on a standard telephone.
3. Are four or less digital or standard ports needed?
If so, RDSU (RSTS) can be used.
Total RDSU PCB slots required
DK424 Configur
Total RSTS PCB slots required
Note
RDSU provides two standard telephone ports (circuits) and four digital ports (circuits) in its basic
configuration. The optional RSTS can be attached to the RDSU to provide two more standard
telephone ports. The RSTU2 can be equipped with an R48S to extend the loop length of the
RSTU2 standard telephone ports from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms (see Table 4-17).
ation
4. Total electronic ports divided by 8 (round up) =
Total PEKU PCB slots required
Note
PEKU provides eight electronic telephone ports (circuits). Circuit 5
(when associated with ports 004, 012, 020, or 028) can only interface
(Refer to Step 5 before
with an HDCB. The HDSS consoles requires two PEKU (see Table
finalizing this number.)
4-20). Each conference amplifier requires use of circuits 2 and 3 of a
PEKU.
5. Are four or less electronic ports or two or less standard ports needed?
If so, PESU can be used
Total PESU PCB slots required
Note
PESU provides two standard telephone ports (circuits) and four electronic telephone circuits
(ports). Circuit 5 (when associated with Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) can only interface with an
HDCB (see Table 4-20).
6. Add totals from Steps 1~5
Total Station PCB slots required
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-23
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
CO Line PCBs/Slots Required
1.
Determine analog loop start line PCB slot requirements.
Total loop start lines (with/ without Caller ID) divided by 8 (round up)
Total RCOU/RCOS PCBs (slots) required
Total loop start lines (with/without Caller ID) divided by 4 (round up)
Total RGLU2/RCOU/PCOU PCBs (slots) required (PCOU existing)
Total analog loop start line PCB slots required
Notes
RGLU2 can provide loop or ground start lines.
RCOU provides four loop start CO lines in its basic configuration. An RCOS can be attached to
the RCOU to add four more loop start CO lines for a total of eight per slot.
PCOU2 provides four loop start CO lines.
The PCOU1 and the PCOU2 are identical in fit, form, and function for the U.S. market.
2. Determine analog ground start line PCB slot requirements.
Total ground start lines (with/without Caller ID) divided by 4 (round up)
Total analog ground start line PCB slots required
Note
RGLU2 provides four CO lines that can be
individually configured as loop start or ground start.
3. Determine E911 CAMA line PCB slot requirements.
Total RMCU/RCMS CAMA PCBs (1 slot) required (RMCU existing)
Note
The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports.
4. Determine Caller ID (FSK) receiver/decoder PCB slot
requirements.
Total loop and ground start lines (with Caller ID) divided by 8 (round up)
Total RCIU2/RCIS PCB slots required
Note
RCIU2 provides four caller ID receiver/decoder circuits. RCIU2 with RCIS subassembly provides
eight caller ID receiver/decoder circuits. Always use RCIU2 with RCIS for up to eight circuits as
opposed to using two RCIU PCBs. These circuits do not use up station port or CO line software
assignments.
5. Determine analog Tie line PCB slot requirements.
Total analog Tie lines (with or without ANI/DNIS) divided by 4
Total REMU/PEMU PCB slots required
4-24
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
Notes
REMU provides four E&M Tie trunks (Type I or II signaling, Wink or Immediate Start, 2- or 4-
wire transmission).
The PEMU1 can also be used. The PEMU only provides Type 1 signaling, 2- or 4-wire
transmission and Immediate Start.
See Table 4-9 for REMU/PEMU maximum quantities. Prior to Release 4, each REMU or PEMU
reduced system station port line and capacity by four ports and four lines. With Release 4, Tie
lines do not use station ports.
6. Determine analog DID line PCB (slot) requirements.
Total analog DID lines (with or without ANI/DNIS) divided by 4
Total RDDU PCB slots required
Notes
RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing lines. (Prior to Release 4, each RDDU reduces
system station port and line capacity by four ports and four lines.) With Release 4, DID lines do
not use station ports.
See Table 4-9 for RDDU (DID analog lines) maximum quantities.
7. Determine RDTU T1 PCB (slot) requirements (loop/ground/Tie/DID lines).
Total loop start lines (channels)
Total ground start lines (channels)
Total Tie lines (with/without ANI/DNIS) (channels)
Total DID lines (with/without ANI/DNIS) (channels)
Total RDTU lines required
DK424 Configur
Note
Contact the T1 provider (Telco or Carrier company) to determine exact T1 channel/line needs.
8. Determine RDTU PCB (slot) requirements.
Total 8-channel RDTU PCB/slots (include skipped slots)
Total 16-channel RDTU PCB/slots (include skipped slots)
ation
Total 24-channel RDTU PCB/slots (include skipped slots)
Total RDTU PCB slots required
Notes
When installing 16 or 24 channel RDTU PCBs into a slot, the next slot or two slots may not be
usable for other PCBs (Tables 4-4 and 4-5 and Worksheet 2.)
RDTU provides either 8, 16, or 24 channels (lines), depending on programming. Each channel
can be set for either DID, ground start CO, loop start CO, or Tie line operation. (Each RDTU Tie
line or DID line reduces the system line and station port capacity by one port.)
As many as six RDTU PCBs can be installed in systems operating with the RCTUC/D common
control unit, as many as two with RCTUB operated systems. The RCTUA does not support
RDTU.
Prior to Release 4, each Tie or DID line reduced system station capacity by one port. With
Release 4, Tie and DID lines do not use station ports.
9. Add totals from Steps 1~7.
Total CO Line PCB slots required
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-25
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 1 System PCB (Slot) Requirements
Attendant Console Slots Required
Enter one slot for each attendant console required (1~4 consoles maximum).
Total RATU PCB slots required
PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSSU Option Slots Required
Enter number of option PCBs required.
Total needed for MIS for ACD (required new)
Total needed for remote/local maintenance with DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC
Total needed for SMDI
Total needed for SMDR (existing PIOU)
Total needed for miscellaneous options (see Table 4-19)
Total PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSSU PCB slots required
Note
The following subassembly PCBs do not required additional cabinet slots:
The IMDU subassembly plugs onto PIOU or PIOUS to provide a remote maintenance modem.
The RMDS subassembly plugs onto the RSIU to provide a remote maintenance modem.
Up to three RSIS subassemblies can plug onto RSIU to provide any option listed in this Step.
PEPU Page Option PCB Required
Enter total number of PEPU PCBs needed.
Total PEPU PCB slots required
Note
PEPU provide 600-ohm interface or 3-watt page output for external page/BGM operation.
System Slots Required
List the number of slots for each of the following:
Total number of Station PCB slots required (see Page 4-23)
Total number of CO Line PCB slots required (see Page 4-25)
Total number of Attendant Console slots required (see Page 4-26)
Total number of Option slots required (see Page 4-26)
Total number of Page Option slots required (see Page 4-26)
Total number of slots required in each cabinet for RRCU remote cabinet PCBs, Cabinets 1~7
(see)
Total system slots required
Cabinets Required
Total system slots divided by 6 or 8 =
Total Cabinets required
Important!
To determine the type of RCTU PCB required, use Table 4-9. The total Universal
slots and features required determine the RCTU PCB needed.
4-26
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 2 System Cabinet Assignment Guide
Worksheet 2 System Cabinet Assignment Guide
DK424 and DK280 Base and Expansion Cabinets are interchangeable. The only system
considerations are:
OCA/RPCI configuration requirements
Channel (8, 16, and 24) RDTU (T1/DS-1 interface) slot configuration requirements
Number of system slots required. (See "System Slots Required" on Page 4-26.)
See Tables 4-9 and 4-10 for OCA/RPCI and T1/DS-1 configuration requirements.
Type
Cabinet
Number of Slots Available
(DK424 or DK280)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Total Number of Slots Available
Number of Slots Required
DK424 Configur
ation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-27
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 3 System PCB Assignment Guide
Worksheet 3 System PCB Assignment Guide
Fill in Worksheet 3 by recording PCBs in the following order (see Worksheet 1 for PCB type and
quantities):
1. Write in the Cabinet Type.
2. Enter the RCTU PCBs as required:
RCTUBA, RCTUC, or RCTUE in slot R11
RCTUA, RCTUBB, RCTUD, or RCTUF in slot RCTU
3. Enter PDKU, PEKU, or RSIU in slot 11.
...and/or if an RSIU is installed in slot 11, install a PDKU or PEKU in slot 12.
4. Starting with the lowest empty slot (S12 or S13), record all station, attendant console, loop
start, ground start PCBs from lower to higher numbered slots (left to right). Record the
appropriate port numbers used by each. Do not leave empty slots except when installing
RDTU PCBs (see Tables 4-4 and 4-5).
5. After all station, attendant console, and ground/loop start line PCBs are recorded, write in all
DID and Tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the highest needed (in
left to right order). Record the line numbers. Do not leave empty slots except when installing
RDTU PCBs.
The maximum number of station ports used by station, PC attendant console, Tie, and DID
PCBs can not exceed the following quantities:
Maximum Ports
Processor
(Station, Tie and DID)
RCTUA
32
RCTUB or RCTUBA/BB
80
RCTUC/D
240
RCTUE/F
336
In some rare configurations, when using RDTU (T1) Tie or DID lines in systems, the
maximum number of stations allowed may be reduced because the RDTU PCB takes up two
or three cabinet slots. Each RDTU, REMU, or RDDU Tie/DID line uses one station port.
RCIU/RCIS PCBs do not use station ports or CO line software time slot assignments.
6. Write in the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, RCIU2/RCIS and RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in any
convenient vacant slot, preferably in the last slots. Record any Caller ID circuit numbers.
7. Write in any Interface PCB Options.
4-28
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 3 System PCB Assignment Guide
Cabinet 1 (Type:1 )
R11
RCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
Cabinet 2 (Type:1 )
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S272
S282
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
Cabinet 3 (Type:1 )
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S372
S382
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
Cabinet 4 (Type:1 )
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S472
S482
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
Cabinet 5 (Type:1 )
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S572
S582
DK424 Configur
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
Cabinet 6 (Type:1 )
S61
S62
S63
S64
S65
S66
S672
S682
ation
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
Cabinet 7 (Type:1 )
S71
S72
S73
S74
S75
S76
S772
S782
PCB Type
Port Nos.
Line Nos.
Option/Note
1. Type = DK280, DK424, or NR (not required). Double-check after completing all worksheets, particularly Worksheet 5 - System
Power Factor Check.
2. Cabinets 2~7: Last two slots are available on the DK424 using RCTUE/F processors, with MBJU removed.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-29
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 3 System PCB Assignment Guide
Remote Cabinet Configuration Guidelines
Several new items must be considered when configuring a system with Remote Cabinets.
1. Each location must be configured independently. Break down the line, trunk and service
circuits by locations and use the rules provided elsewhere in this chapter to determine the
required quantities of cards.
2. Estimate the number of cabinets according to normal configuration rules.
3. Account for RRCU1A cards at each remote location. An RRCU1A card can support up to two
Expansion Cabinets at one remote location. For example, 20 PCBs at one location would
require three Expansion Cabinets and two RRCU1A cards. See Figure 5-39 on Page 5-60.
4. If necessary, adjust the number of cabinets required. The maximum number of Expansion
Cabinets per system is six. The maximum number of locations is five. In a maximum
configuration, at least one location will have two Expansion Cabinets.
5. Calculate the total number of RRCU1A cards required at all remote locations. Add the same
number of RRCU1A cards to the configuration of the base cabinet. If necessary, add a cabinet
at the base location to hold the cards displaced by the RRCU1As in the base cabinet.
6. Check the validity of the configuration. A valid configuration will generate positive answers to
the following questions.
Do all cabinets (local and remote) comply with power limitations? The RRCU1A has a
power factor of 4.5.
Are there six or fewer remote locations?
Are there five or fewer RRCU1A cards in the base cabinet?
7. Order one RDCL Data Cable Kit for each RRCU PCB. The kit includes one replacement door,
one cable bracket and two data cables.
8. Order one cabinet cover for each remote location.
9. Digital Trunks. A Remote Cabinet will support all PCBs that may be installed in a local
Expansion Cabinet, including digital trunk cards. However, the system cannot derive network
clock synchronization from a digital trunk installed in a remote cabinet. This requires a digital
trunk installed in the Base Cabinet or in a local Expansion Cabinet connected to the base by a
standard ribbon cable.
4-30
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 4 Option Configuration Guide
Worksheet 4 Option Configuration Guide
Number
Option
Comments
Required
An RRCS (-4, -8 or 12 DTMF receiver circuits) must be installed on the RCTUA,
RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F if the customer has: DTMF DID,
RRCS PCB
Tie, ANI, DNIS, DISA lines (remote change of call forward destination), DNIS
External Call Routing, using DTMF standard telephones, or voice mail-type
RRCS-4
devices with DTMF interfaces
...or if the customer has built-in AA connected to RDSU, RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, or
RRCS-8
PESU standard telephone ports.
Both the RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F can support one RRCS on each PCB, 2
RRCS-12
RRCSs total (maximum 24 DTMF receivers). For normal traffic, an RRCS-4 is
sufficient. However, for extremely high traffic, use an RRCS-8, -12, or multiple
RRCSs for large systems.
If built-in AA ACD, or ACD/MIS is required, one RKYS option key is required see
RKYS1, 2, or 3
Table 4-18.
PIOU/RSIU
Subassembly
One IMDU PCB may be installed on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB to provide built-in
PCBs
remote maintenance modem capability for the Strata DK system.
IMDU PCB
One RMDS PCB may be installed on the RSIU PCB to provide built-in remote
RMDS PCB
maintenance modem for the Strata DK424 system.
DK424 Configur
Up to three RSIS PCBs may be installed on the RSIU PCB to provide one or more
RSIS
of the following RS-232 interface ports: MIS for ACD, SMDR, SMDI, and/or Local
Maintenance (TTY) Port for DKi Admin/Backup PC.
One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the
HESC-65A
HHEU in each digital telephone and 6500-series electronic telephone requiring
the Loud Ringing Bell option.
ation
One HESB is required for each digital and electronic telephone providing the Loud
Ringing Bell option.
One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to either a
HESB Amplifier/
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU (customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in
Speaker
place of the HESB).
One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page speaker connected to a
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU (a customer-supplied talkback amplifier/page speaker
may be used in place of HESB).
PPTC/PPTC9
Adapter (Modular
PPTC adapter is used to connect an external modem DB25 female connector to a
to RS-232)
PIOU/ PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS modular jack. If a PPTC is used, a null modem adapter
is also required.
PPTC
(25-pin)
PPTC9 adapter is used to connect a personal computer DB9 male COM port
connector to a PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS modular jack. These adaptors are
required for: SMIS for ACD, SMDI, SMDR, and system maintenance PC or
PPTC-9
terminal interface.
(9-pin)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-31
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 4 Option Configuration Guide
Number
Option
Comments
Required
The DPFT provides a means to connect eight selected CO lines to standard
telephones in the event of a power failure (each DPFT requires an RSTU or PSTU
DPFT Unit
PCB). There is no limit to the number of DPFTs installed, provided that the system
power factor is not exceeded.
The MDFB door phone option plugs into the DDCB or HDCB control box to
provide a door phone. Three MDFBs can be connected to each DDCB or HDCB.
MDFB
The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker to provide page
talkback.
Battery distribution box required when connecting reserve power batteries to three
or more cabinets (wall or floor mount).
RBDB2
Six RBTC2A-1.5M cables are provided with the RBDB2 to connect up to six
DK424 power supplies to the battery distribution box. Another cable is required for
the seventh cabinet. See RC7C1A-1.7M in this table.
Conduit connection box required for AC and battery power connection to three or
more floor-mounted cabinets. (Not required for mounting two cabinets on a table
or any number of cabinets on a wall.)
RCCB1 or
Use RCCB1 for one to six cabinet floor installations. Use RCCB2 for seven
RCCB2
cabinets.
RCCB conduit box is required for floor mount installations of three or more
Cabinets.
Floor mount fixture kit is required when floor mounting any number of cabinets.
Provides two metal stands for mounting three or more cabinets on floor. Three
RFIF
pairs of wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with RFIF.
Wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety
purposes.
Three-outlet AC Power Stripone RPSB1 required when installing three or four
cabinets (wall or floor mount).
Two RPSB1s required when installing five, six, or seven cabinets (wall or floor
mount). Two AC cords will exit the cabinets in some configurations.
RPSB1/RPSB2
RPSB2 is a high current carrying capacity cord for application where local electric
codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets. It is highly
recommended to use the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations to accommodate
further growth. Must be ordered for seven cabinet systems.
Two reserve power cables (for current carrying capacity) are required for three to
six cabinets and three are required for seven cabinets when connecting reserve
RBTC1A-2M
power battery terminals to three or more cabinets (wall mount). RBDB2 is also
requiredsee "RBDB2" below.
One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet if connecting reserve power
PBTC-3M
for one or two cabinets (wall or table mount). Cable connects cabinet power
supply to battery terminals.
Two cables used for seven cabinet installations only. Provides long data cable to
connect the sixth Expansion Cabinet to the DK424 Base Cabinet. Provides a long
RC7C1A-1.7M
battery cable to connect RBDB2 battery distribution box to the Base Cabinet
power supply.
Refer to Toshiba Stratagy or VP documentation for detailed information about the
Stratagy or VP
VM machines and to C2 of Worksheet 2 in this chapter for DK424 VM port
Voice Mail
requirements.
4-32
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 4 Option Configuration Guide
Number
Option
Comments
Required
PC Attendant
Consoles
(with RATI and
RATHC)
These features require customer-supplied personal computers. See feature user
guides for individual personal computer requirements.
DKi Admin/
Backup
SMIS for ACD
Other Customer-
supplied Items
Telephone
Number
Subassembly
Comments
Required
Option
One EOCU must be installed on each PEKU and/or PESU that is connected to
electronic telephones which are equipped to receive OCA.
EOCU
Place the PEKU or PESU where it will provide the most efficient use of the 8-
circuit EOCU: The PESU only provides 4 electronic telephone ports; HDSS
consoles use s ports on a PEKU; HDCBs use 1 port on a PESU or PEKU.
One DVSU is required for each digital telephone (2000, 1000-series) that should
DVSU
receive telephone speaker OCA. Not required for Handset/Headset Speaker
OCA.
6500-series Electronic Telephones equipped with one HVSU2 to receive Speaker
HVSU2
DK424 Configur
OCA calls.
Electronic Telephones equipped with the older HVSU and HVSI subassemblies
HVSU/HVSI
(one per telephone) to receive OCA calls.
One HHEU PCB must be installed in each digital (2000, 1000 series) and
HHEU
electronic telephone (6500, 6005 series) that supports a headset or connects to
at
an HESB providing a loud ringing bell.
ion
PDIU-DI2
One PDIU-DI2 or PDIU-DI data calling interface can be installed on a 2000-series
Digital Telephones.
PDIU-DI
2000-series Digital Telephones must be equipped with an RPCI-DI to transmit and
RPCI-D1
receive voice and data calls and/or interface with a TAPI PC application interface.
One RPCI-DI per telephone.
One or two Add-on Modules can be attached to 2000-series Digital Telephones to
DADM
provide an additional 20 or 40 buttons. Any combination of CO /LQH, '66, and
6' (Speed Dial) buttons can be added to DADMs.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-33
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check
The Strata DK power supply was engineered for maximum cost efficiency to provide power for
the most configurations. Because of this design, some power limitations exist when using old
electronic-type telephones and/or telephone option hardware.
For example, only 24 3000-series telephones can be installed in a cabinet. Each telephone and
PCB has a negative Power Factor (PF) and the RPSU424 or RPSU280 power supply have a
positive PF (+65). The sum of the telephones' PFs and PCBs connected to a signal cabinet must
not exceed 65. In the case of +5VDC, the power factor must not exceed 25.
The sum of the calculated cabinet PFs must not exceed the values provided on Page 4-38. Table
4-23 shows the PF for PCBs and the RPSU280. PF numbers for telephones and devices are shown
on the following page.
Note
The maximum number of RWIUs must not exceed one for the Base Cabinet and two for
the Expansion Cabinets.
Table 4-23
PCB and Power Supply Power Factors
PCB Type
+5VDC
-24VDC
Notes
IMDU
0.1
0.16
PCOU1, 2
1.9
2.0
PDKU1, 2
0.8
0.3
With 8 DKTs.
PEKU
1.6
0.7
With 8 EKTs.
PEPU
1.1
6.5
PESU
1.5
0.5
With 4 EKTs and 4 SLTs.
PIOU
2.0
6.5
PIOU2
1.1
6.5
PIOUS
0.75
4.0
Power Supply RPSU280
25.0
65.0
or RPSU424
R40S1A
0.0
2.8
Does not use +5VDC.
RATU
1.7
0.3
RBSS1A
0.6
0.3
RBSS2A
0.0
0.3
Does not use +5VDC.
RBSU + RBSS
3.1
0.3
RBSU1A
2.5
1.0
RBSU2A
0.0
1.0
Does not use +5VDC.
RBUS1A
0.0
0.3
Does not use +5VDC.
RBUU1A
0.0
1.0
Does not use +5VDC.
RCIS1A
0.3
0.1
RCIU1A/2A
0.7
0.2
RCIU2
0.2
RCMS1A
0.6
0.3
RCOS1A/2A
1.7
2.0
RCOU (4 CO)
2.5
2.0
RCOU + RCOS (8 CO)
3.6
4.0
RCOU1A/2A
1.9
2.0
RCTUA
2.0
1.0
4-34
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check
Table 4-23
PCB and Power Supply Power Factors (continued)
PCB Type
+5VDC
-24VDC
Notes
RCTUB
4.0
1.0
RCTUBA/BB
4.0
1.9
RCTUC/D
4.5
1.9
RCTUE/F
10.0
1.9
RDDU
2.6
7.0
RDSU (-24VDC)
1.1
0.3
With 4 DKTs and 4 SLTs.
RDSU + R48S (-48VDC)
1.1
0.5
RDTU
1.8
1.0
REMU2/PEMU
1.0
7.5
RGLU1A/2A
2.1
2.5
RMCU1A
0.7
0.3
RMDS1A
0.35
0.16
2400 bps MODEM.
RPTU
2.6
1.0
RRCS-12
1.5
1.0
RRCS-4
0.4
0.3
RRCS-8
1.0
0.5
RRCU1A
4.5
0
RSIS1A
0.35
0.15
2400 bps.
RSIU1A
1.0
0.3
9600 bps.
RSSU
0.7
0.3
RSTU/RSTU2 (-24VDC)
1.4
0.5
With 8 SLTs.
RSTU1 + R48S (-48VDC)
1.4
1.0
With 8 SLTs.
DK424 Configur
RSTU2 + R48S (-48VDC)
4.0
2.3
With 8 MWs.
RWIU
9.2
0.0
With 8, 16, 24, or 32 handsets.
Note
Power factor calculation samples are shown in Tables 4-24 and 4-25.
at
Table 4-24
Strata DK424 Base Cabinet
ion
PCB
Quantity
+5VDC
-24VDC
PDKU2A
2
1.6
0.3
RBSU1A + RBSS1A
1
3.2
0.3
RCOS1A
1
3.6
4.0 (8 COs)
RCTUA3A
1
2.0
1.0
RRCS1A-4
1
0.4
0.3
RWIU
1
9.0
0.0
Total
7
19.8
5.9
Table 4-25
Strata DK424 Expansion Cabinet
PCB
Quantity
+5VDC
-24VDC
RBSU1A + RBSS1A
1
3.2
0.3
RCOU1A + RSOU1A
1
3.6
4.0 (8 COs)
RWIU
2
18.0
0.0
Total
4
24.8
4.3
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-35
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check
Telephone/Device Power Factors
The power supply of each cabinet supplies a limited amount of power. For each cabinet, calculate
the total Telephone/Device PF and add it to the appropriate cabinet in "Cabinet Power Factor,
PCB/Telephone Device" on Page 4-38.
Base Cabinet
Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet
Expansion Cabinet
Telephone/Device
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Qty.
PF
Total
Qty.
PF
Total
Qty.
PF
Total
Qty.
PF
Total
Digital Telephone
(DKT, any series)
1~120 Telephones
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
121~240 Telephones
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
2000-series Electronic
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
Telephone (EKT)
3000-series EKT
x 2.5 =
x 2.5 =
x 2.5 =
x 2.5 =
6000-series EKT
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
6005-series EKT
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
6500-series EKT
1~120 Telephones
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
121~240 Telephones
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
DDCB/HDCB
x 1.2 =
x 1.2 =
x 1.2 =
x 1.2 =
(with MDFB)
DDSS/HDSS Console
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
Add-on Module
x 0.4 =
x 0.4 =
x 0.4 =
x 0.4 =
(DADM)
Integrated PDIU-DI
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
Integrated RPCI-DI
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
Stand-alone Data
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
Interface Unit
Standard Telephone
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
(-48VDC)
Standard Telephone
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
(-24VDC)
Attendant Console
x 4.0 =
x 4.0 =
x 4.0 =
x 4.0 =
Power Failure Unit
x 3.0 =
x 3.0 =
x 3.0 =
x 3.0 =
(DPFT)
HHEU
x 0.1 =
x 0.1 =
x 0.1 =
x 0.1 =
Total Power Factor
(PF)
Note
PF varies by number of telephones because of station paging limit of 120 telephones.
Always use "1.0" for DKT telephones when calculating PFs for individual cabinets.
4-36
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check
Expansion Cabinet (5)
Expansion Cabinet (6)
Expansion Cabinet (7)
Telephone/Device
Qty.
PF
Total
Qty.
PF
Total
Qty.
PF
Total
Digital Telephone
(DKT, any series)
1~120 Telephones
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
121~240 Telephones
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
2000-series Electronic
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
Telephone (EKT)
3000-series EKT
x 2.5 =
x 2.5 =
x 2.5 =
6000-series EKT
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
6005-series EKT
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
x 2.0 =
6500-series EKT
1~120 Telephones
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
121~240 Telephones
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
x 0.6 =
DDCB/HDCB (w.MDFB)
x 1.2 =
x 1.2 =
x 1.2 =
DDSS/HDSS Console
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
Add-on Module
x 0.4 =
x 0.4 =
x 0.4 =
Integrated PDIU-DI
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
Integrated RPCI-DI
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
DK424 Configur
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
x 0.8 =
Standard Telephone (-48VDC)
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
x 1.0 =
Standard Telephone (-24VDC)
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
x 0.5 =
Attendant Console
x 4.0 =
x 4.0 =
x 4.0 =
at
Power Failure Unit (DPFT)
x 3.0 =
x 3.0 =
x 3.0 =
ion
HHEU
x 0.1 =
x 0.1 =
x 0.1 =
Total Power Factor (PF)
Note
PF varies by number of telephones because of station paging limit of 120 telephones.
Always use "1.0" for DKT telephones when calculating PFs for individual cabinets.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
4-37
DK424 Configuration
Worksheet 5 System Power Factor Check
Cabinet Power Factor, PCB/Telephone Device
Calculate the total PF of each cabinet (must be less than 65). See Worksheet 2, Table 4-9 for PCB
quantity and type, and Table 4-23 for PF numbers.
The Total Cabinet PF must not exceed the limits shown in Max. PF Allowed, at the bottom of this
chart.
Cabinets
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PF
PF
PF
PF
PF
PF
PF
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
1
2
3
s
4
Slot
5
6
7
8
Cabinet PF
(subtotal)
Telephone/
Device PF
(Page 4-36)
Cabinet PF
(total)
Power Factor
Max. PF
Allowed
65
130
195
260
325
390
455
(all cabinets
combined)
Note
Cabinets 2~7: Last two slots are available on the DK424 (RCTUE/F).
4-38
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
5
This chapter explains how to install the Strata DK424 system. It includes information on site
requirements and provides installation instructions for various cabinet configurations. It also
explains how to install ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (Battery Backup) cabling,
and Printed Circuit Board (PCB) cabling.
Inspection
When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any
damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the
proper claims.
After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all
equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately.
Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system
hardware.
Packaging and Storage
CAUTION!
When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back
DK424 Installa
(soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges.
When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply
may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their
original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment
tion
in its original shipping containers.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-1
DK424 Installation
Site Requirements
Site Requirements
Input Power
The DK424 requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17.5 amps. The
system requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded.
DK424 expansion cabinets installed at remote locations require their own 115VAC + 10VAC, 50/
60 Hz power sources. Each Remote Expansion Cabinet requires 2.5 amps. The system or remote
cabinet installation requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and
grounded.
See "Power Supply Installation" on Page 5-8 for complete AC power cabling, ground wiring and
battery installation instructions for local and remote cabinets.
CAUTION!
To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is recommended that an On/Off wall
switch not be used on AC circuits dedicated for the use of DK424.
A reserve power source (two or four customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be connected to the
DK424 to serve as a backup in case of power failure.
Separate reserve power may be required for remote expansion cabinets.
Clearance and Location
The Base and optional Expansion Cabinets may be either floor or wall mounted. Figure 5-1 shows
the minimum clearance requirements. See "Wall Mounting" on Page 5-11 and "AC Power
Distribution for Six Cabinets" on Page 5-36 for details.
Notes
Floor mounting requires the following additional hardware:
RFIF floor mounting stands and brackets.
RCCB electrical conduit box, if three or more cabinets are installed.
Wall mounting may require a plywood (3/4 inch thick) backboard.
When selecting a location for the cabinets, the location must be:
Dry and clean
Well-ventilated
Well-illuminated
Easily accessible
The location must not be:
Subject to extreme heat or cold
Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants
Subject to excessive vibration
Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment
Optional customer-supplied reserve batteries require a well-ventilated location close (within nine
feet) to the DK424 cabinets.
5-2
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Site Requirements
Front View
Top View
14.5"
Wall
23.6"
24"
23.6"
Cabinets
9.75 "
Base
24"
Cabinet
Expansion
Cabinet
Wall
Expansion
36"
Cabinet
Expansion
78"
Cabinet
Expansion
Cabinet
Expansion
Cabinet
Minimum Clearance Requirements
(Wall Mounting)
Expansion
Cabinet
6"
Floor
Front View
Top View
13.5"
23.6"
24"
Wall
23.6"
Base
24"
Cabinets
11.75 "
Cabinet
2" Brackets
(RWBF)
Expansion
Cabinet
Wall
Expansion
Cabinet
36"
Expansion
75"
Cabinet
Expansion
Cabinet
3" Floor
DK424 Installa
Expansion
Mount
Cabinet
Stands
(RFMF)
Minimum Clearance Requirements
Expansion
Cabinet
(Floor Mounting)
3"
Floor
tion
1451
Figure 5-1
DK424 Minimum Clearance Requirements
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-3
DK424 Installation
Site Requirements
Electrical/Environmental Requirements and Characteristics
See Table 5-1 for the DK424 electrical/environmental requirements and characteristics.
Table 5-1
Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK424 Primary Power
Input AC
115VAC ± 10VAC
AC amps for seven-cabinet system
20 amp circuit
AC frequency
50/60 Hz
Watts per cabinet (continuous)
180
Watts for seven-cabinet system (continuous)
845
DK424 Maximum Peak AC Input Current
1 cabinet 2.5 amps
5 cabinets 11.5 amps
2 cabinets 5.0 amps
6 cabinets 15.0 amps
3 cabinets 7.5 amps
7 cabinets 17.5 amps
4 cabinets 10.0 amps
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
32~104° F (0~40° C)
Operating humidity
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
Storage temperature
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
-24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC)
DC voltage output specification
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
-5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion Cabinet only
Battery Charger Characteristics
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC
PESU (Circuits 1 and 2)
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Ring voltage
Low position 130 ±20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ±25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability
2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
RSTU2 or RDSU
Ring voltage
80V RMS sine wave
Ringing capability
1.5 REN per circuit, with or without Message Waiting
RSTU2 Message Waiting voltage
-90 VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.)
RSTU2 or PESU modem interface data rate
14,400 bps maximum
BTU Rating
PDKU (5)
RCOU/RCOS (1)
190 BTUs (56 watt hours) per cabinet
RCTUB (1)
DKTs (40)
Traffic Rating Characteristics
9 CCS per station system-wide
36 CCS per ACD/SMIS station
Note
There are system limits for the number of simultaneous Agents depending on traffic. See the Strata DK424 Call
Center Solutions General Description for details.
5-4
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Site Requirements
Cable Lengths
In a single site installation, the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets must be placed within the
allowed maximum distance of each other as designated by Table 5-2.
Table 5-2
Station Loop Requirements
Max Loop
No. of Wire Pairs
Interface PCB
Resistance
Maximum Distance from
Device
(use 24 AWG
Circuits
(including
Cabinet to Device
twisted pair)
device)
PDKU (1~8)
Digital telephones1
or
RDSU (5~8)
DDSS consoles
PDKU (8)
1-pair
PDKU (1~8)
PDIU-DS
or
RDSU (5~8)
PDKU or
DDCB
RDSU (5)
Attendant Console
RATU (1~4)
2-pair
40 ohms
1000 ft. (303 m)
PEKU (5) or
HDCB
PESU (5)2
2-pair (3-pair
Electronic telephones
PEKU or PESU
required for OCA)
RPCI-DI
PDKU (1~8)
or
or
PDIU-D12
RDSU (5~8)
Shares digital
telephone wire-
PDKU (1~8)
pair1
DADM
or
RDSU (5~8)
RATI
RATU (1~4)
1 or 2-pair
HDSS consoles
PEKU (7 & 8)
2-pair
20 ohms
500 ft. (152 m)
PSTU (1~8)
Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m)
or
300 ohms
with 150 ohm device.3
PESU (1 & 2)1
DK424 Installa
RSTU (1~8)
Standard telephones,
RDSU/RSTS (1~4)
Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m)
voice mail, Auto
1-pair
600 ohms
without R48S
with 150 ohm device.3
Attendant, etc.
option
RSTU (1~8)
Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m)
tion
RDSU/RSTS (1~4)
1,200 ohms
with 150 ohm device.3
with R48S option
1. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range with DADM, OCA, Headset, or
Data Interface Unit.
2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used.
3. See manufacturer's product specifications for exact resistance of device.
Remote Expansion Cabinets may be installed up to three kilometers away, using fiber optics and
RRCU1A PCBs.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-5
DK424 Installation
Site Requirements
Network Requirements
The system network requirements are provided in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3
DK424 Network Requirements
Ringer
Universal Service
PCB/Interface
Facility Interface Code
Network Jack
Equivalence
Order Code
OL13A (PESU)
PESU/RSTU2/RDSU1
OL13B (RSTU2, 24V)
RJ21X
N/A
9.0F
(Off-premises Station)
OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU
with R48S-48V)
RCOU/RCOS
02LS2
RJ14C/RJ21X
0.3B
N/A
(loop start line)
RDDU
02RV2-T
RJ14C/RJ21X
0.0B
AS.2
TL11M, 2-wire
RJ2EX
TL31M, 4-wire
RJ2GX
Not Available
REMU type 1 or type 2
9.0F
TL12M, type 2, 2-wire
RJ2FX
(N/A)
TL32M, type 2, 4-wire
RJ2HX
RGLU2 (ground or loop start
02GS2 (ground)
RJ14C/RJ1CX
0.3B
N/A
line)
02LS2 (loop)
(See last bullet note on
RJ48C/RJ48X/
RDTU (DS-1/T1)2
N/A
6.0P
Note 2 below.)
RJ48M
RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID)
N/A
RJ21X/RJ14C
0.3B
N/A
RPTU (PRI)3
04DU9-1SN
RJ48C/RJ48M
N/A
RBSU/RBSS (S/T, BRI)3
02IS5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
6.0P
RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI)3
02IS5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
RCMU/RCMS (CAMA)
02RV2-O
RJ11C/RJ21-X
N/A
1. Only PESU circuits 1 and 2, and RDSU circuits 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) capability. PESU must use OL13A or
equivalent line conditioning for OPS connection. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing 24 volt loop voltage. If
equipped with the 48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection.
2. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified:
The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels.
Unused channels must be bit-stuffed.
Type of CO line assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or Immediate).
Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame Format
to be used, either is adequate for DK424 CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance monitoring, but
requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU.
Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally specified
the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for DK424 T1 CO digital voice lines.
The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the DK424 T1 circuit to the Telco T1 circuit.
(CSUs are a Telco requirement.)
RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN.
3. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits
may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs
must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified.
Note
Digital trunks (RDTU, RPTU) may be installed in a Remote Expansion Cabinet; however,
the system can only derive Network Clock Synchronization from digital trunks installed in
a Base Cabinet.
5-6
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Installation Considerations
Cabinet Installation Considerations
The Base (DKSUB424) and Expansion Cabinets (DKSUE424) can be wall or floor mounted. To
make it easier to add cabinets (after the initial installation) when a customer needs to expand,
install the Base Cabinet on top for wall-mount installations and on the bottom for floor-mount
installations.
The dimensions of the Base and Expansion Cabinets are:
Height:
Base Cabinet: 11 3/4 inches
Height:
Expansion Cabinet/Remote Expansion Cabinet: 10 inches
Width:
23 5/8 inches
Depth:
9 3/4 inches
Weight:
approx. 30.5 lbs. (14 kg.)
Note
The weight approximates a cabinet completely filled with PCBs. Weight may vary
slightly, depending on PCBs.
Recommended Installation Sequence
Step
Reference Information
1.
Install power supplies in cabinets.
"Power Supply Installation" on Page 5-8.
"Wall Mounting" on Page 5-11.
2.
Mount cabinets on floor or wall.
"Cabinet Floor Mounting" on Page 5-21.
3.
Install ground wiring.
"AC Power and Third Wire Ground Test" on Page 5-29.
4.
Install AC power cabling to cabinets.
"AC Power Cabling Installation" on Page 5-30.
5.
Install reserve power cabling.
"Reserve Power Installation" on Page 5-32.
6.
Install PCBs and PCB cabling.
Figures 5-10, 5-12, and 5-21.
Note
Each cabinet requires four wood screws (#12X 1.25 inch size) for wall mount installation.
Wood screws are not provided with the system.
DK424 Installa
tion
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-7
DK424 Installation
Power Supply Installation
Power Supply Installation
The Base and Expansion Cabinets are shipped from the factory without the power supply installed.
The DK424 cabinets use the same power supply (RPSU280 and/or RPSU424) as the DK280.
Note
RPSU280 and RPSU424 are fit, form, and functionally the same. They can be
interchanged and mixed in DK280 and DK424 systems.
To install power supplies in cabinets of new or installed systems
1. Remove the power supply from its box. The box should also contain a plastic bag with two
jumper plugs for the power supply DKSUB or DKSUE connector. An AC power cord and the
power supply mounting screws are provided with the KSU cabinet.
2. Make sure that the front and right side covers are removed from the cabinet (see Figure 5-2).
3. Slide the power supply into the right side of the cabinet so that its four mounting holes align
with the four cabinet mounting holes (see Figure 5-3). (Make sure that the two backplane FG
wires are positioned between the FG wire holder and the power supply.)
Note
The backplane FG wires are not safety grounds: they are required for proper system CO
line operation.
4. Plug the DC OUT cable plug into the DC OUT connector on the power supply. (The plug has
a guide key on it to ensure that it is plugged in correctly.)
5. Secure the FG wire spade lug to the power supply with the FG screw.
6. Secure the power supply to the cabinet with the four provided screws.
7. If the cabinet is the Base Unit, a standalone Remote Expansion Cabinet, or the first in a stack
of Remote Expansion Cabinets, plug the Base Jumper Plug into the "DKSUB" jumper
connector on the power supply (see Figure 5-3).
8. If the cabinet is an Expansion Unit (DKSUE), plug the jumper plug that does not have a wire
connected into the "DKSUE" jumper connector.
Important!
The power supply with the "DKSUB" jumper plug (plug with wire) installed is the
master and has On/Off control over all other power supplies, which are designated
as slaves. If the master power supply is turned Off or On, all other power supplies
will automatically turn Off or On. (Individual power supplies must be turned On.)
Power supplies that have the "DKSUE" jumper plugs (plug without wire) installed
will not control other power supplies, but can be turned Off or On individually with
their own On/Off switch. (The master power supply must be on and the intercabinet
"Data" ribbon cable must be installed to allow a slave power supply to be turned
On.)
9. See Figure 5-3 to ensure that the power supply is properly installed.
10. Install power supplies in all cabinets, using Steps 1~9.
11. Install the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets, ground wiring, AC and reserve power
cabling, and PCB cabling per the "Recommended Installation Sequence" on Page 5-7.
Note
Power Supply testing procedures are provided in the Fault Finding chapter, which should
be referred to if it is suspected that the power supply does not work properly.
5-8
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Power Supply Installation
Plastic Bag with Four Power Supply
Mounting Screws Supplied with each
Cabinet
Shift cover
left to remove
front cover.
Intercabinet Power Supply
Ground Wire (Supplied with
each Expansion Cabinet)
Top Cover
(Base Cabinet Only)
Loosen four screws to
remove the top cover:
Note:
Do not remove the top
cover if the Base Cabinet
is the top cabinet.
Front
Cover
Remove this
screw to remove
the front cover
DK424 Installa
Right Side
Cover
Front
Right
tion
Loosen two screws
Loosen three screws
to remove the side covers
1452
to remove front cover
(right and left side covers)
Figure 5-2
DK424 Cabinet Front, Side, and Top Cover Removal and Installation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-9
DK424 Installation
Power Supply Installation
DC Out Cable and Plug
R11
PCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
Top (2)
Mounting
Holes
Bottom (2)
Mounting
Holes
R11
RCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
4251
FG Wire and Spade Lug
(Functional Ground)
Jumper with wire must be
installed only in base cabinet
power supply using this
Power Supply
connector
DC OUT
DC Out Connector
Jumper with no wire must be
1
POWER
installed in all expansion
-24V
2
+5V
24V Circuit
DKSUB
cabinet power supplies using
DKSUE
3
-5V
Breakers
this connector
Power Indicator
LEDs (Green)
+
Base
BATT
-
Jumper Plug
ON
FG Wire Holder
Expansion
OFF
Jumper Plug
AC IN
FG
FG Screw (3)
Note
Power Supply Jumpers are
shipped in a plastic bag
attached to each power
supply as follows:
DC Voltage Pins
ON/OFF
AC Power Cord
Switch
Red
No
Blue
White
Green
Third Wire Ground or Power
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Supply Daisy Chain Ground
+5V
0V
5V
+5V
0V
to Next Power Supply
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
0V
0V
24V
24V
24V
24V Circuit Breaker Assignments:
DC Voltage Specification
Base Cabinet
EXP. Cabinet
24V-1
S15, S16
24V-1
SX1, SX2
+5V (+4.5 ~ +5.5)
BATT (Volts)
24V-2
S13, S14
24V-2
SX3, SX4, SX5
-5V (4.5 ~ 5.5),
+
0
Expansion Cabinet only
24V-3
S11, S12
24V-3
SX6, SX7, SX8
-24V (26.3 ~ 27.8)
26.3 ~ 27.8*
On RPSU424, the BATT output is 0 volts unless
*
connected to good batteries
Figure 5-3
DK424 Power Supply (RPSU280 or RPSU424) Installation
5-10
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
Power Supply (RPSU280 or RPSU424) Removal
1. Remove the front and right side covers (Figures 5-2 and 5-3) from the cabinet where the power
supply will be removed. Remove the right side covers of other cabinets as necessary to
disconnect wiring.
2. Turn the power supply Off, and disconnect the AC power cord, all ground wiring and reserve
power cabling that is connected to the power supply.
3. Disconnect the DC OUT cable plug from the DC OUT connector.
4. Loosen the four mounting screws securing the power supply to the cabinet and remove the
power supply.
Power Supply Replacement
Install the replacement power supply per "Power Supply Installation" on Page 5-8.
Wall Mounting
If the cabinet mounting holes align with wall studs, the cabinet can be installed directly on the wall
(see Figure 5-4). For more than two cabinets, a wooden backboard between the cabinet and the
wall is highly recommended (see Figure 5-5).
Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) or First Remote Expansion Cabinet Installation
1. If using a backboard: Obtain a board, such as plywood, that is at least 3/4 of an inch thick. The
board should be at least 6-1/2 feet high (completely expanded systems with seven cabinets
require this much height) and two feet wide (minimum).
Secure the board to the wall with wood screws with the bottom edge of the board is six inches
above the floor. (If there are wall studs, make sure the screws align with the studs.)
2. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion
Cabinet (see Figure 5-6).
Note
The bottom left screw must be completely removed. The two screws on each side cover
and the three screws on the front cover should only be loosened and the covers slid to the
right for removal.
DK424 Installa
3. Hold the Base Cabinet back cover against the wall or backboard so that its two top mounting
holes are approximately 6-1/2 feet (78 inches) above the floor. This allows seven cabinets to
be installed (top-down) with a six-inch clearance between the floor and bottom cabinet (see
Figures 5-7 and 5-8).
tion
4. Use a level to make sure that the back cover is held level.
5. Trace the upper arch of the top mounting holes with a pencil.
6. Remove the back cover from the wall.
7. Draw a line between the top two marking hole marks.
8. Drill holes on the line in the middle of the arch tracing.
9. Screw #12 X 1.25 inch size wood screws into the two drilled holes, leaving about 1/8 of an
inch clearance between the screw heads and the wall.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-11
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
10. Hang the Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet back cover from the top two screws
and secure the screws into the wall.
11. Drill holes at the bottom two mounting holes of the back cover, and secure #12 X 1.25 inch
wood screws into the two holes.
12. If installing a Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet: Position the cabinet on the
back cover cabinet hangers, slide the cabinet to the right to the proper mounting position, and
secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws on the right side of the cabinet. If
installing Expansion Cabinets, skip to "Cabinet Floor Mounting" on Page 5-21.
13. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the
"Recommended Installation Sequence" on Page 5-7.
14. Fill out the slot identification label on the cabinet (see Figure 5-11).
15. Reinstall the front cover, top cover, and side covers onto the cabinet.
Expansion Cabinet Installation (DKSUE424)
Note
Toshiba recommends installing cabinets (see Figures 5-5~5-10 and 5-27) from the top
down, with the Base Cabinet on top, the first Expansion Cabinet below it, the second
Cabinet below that, etc.
1. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Expansion Cabinets.
Note
The bottom left screw must be completely removed. The two screws on each side cover
and the three screws on the front cover should only be loosened and the covers slid to the
right for removal.
2. Hold an Expansion Cabinet back cover against the wall so that its top locating parts align with
the bottom locating parts of the Base Cabinet back cover. To secure the Expansion Cabinet
back cover to the wall or wall board, repeat Steps 5~11 from "Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) or
First Remote Expansion Cabinet Installation" on Page 5-11.
3. To install additional Expansion Cabinet back covers, repeat Step 2 above.
4. Starting with the top Expansion Cabinet back cover (which is fastened to the wall), position an
Expansion Cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers. Slide the cabinet to the right to the
proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws to the right
side of the back cover. Repeat for all other Expansion Cabinets.
5. Loosen the bonding connection plates fastened on both sides of the first Expansion Cabinet,
then fasten the plates between the Base Cabinet and the first Expansion Cabinet. Repeat to
connect the first Expansion Cabinet to the second Expansion Cabinet, etc.
6. Base Cabinet: Loosen data cable door locking screws and open data cable doors; then connect
the first Expansion Cabinet data cable to the "CAB 2" (top) data cable connector on the Base
Cabinet. Install data cables in appropriate connectors for all other Expansion Cabinets).
...or Remote Expansion Cabinet. See details on Figure 5-41 on Page 5-62.
7. After all data cables are installed, close data cable doors and secure with the locking screw.
Important!
Data cable door screws must be firmly tightened for proper system operation.
8. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the
"Recommended Installation Sequence" on Page 5-7.
9. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet.
5-12
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
10. Reinstall covers onto cabinets.
Wall
16 in.
Dealer Supplied
#12 X 1.25"
Wood Screws
(4 Screws per
Cabinet)
Back Cover
DK424 Installa
tion
1455
Up
Front
Figure 5-4
DK424 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram (Directly on the Wall)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-13
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
Locating
Parts
Plaster Board Wall
3/4" Plywood Backboard
#12 X 1.25"
Wood Screws
(As many as necessary to
secure plywood backboard)
Dealer Supplied
#12 X 1.25"
Wood Screws
(4 Screws Per
Cabinet)
Back Cover
6.5 ft.
(for seven cabinets )
Up
6 inches between
Front
bottom cabinet
and floor
1456
Floor
Figure 5-5
DK424 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram (with Plywood Backboard)
5-14
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
Top Cover
(Base Cabinet Only)
Loosen four screws to
remove the top cover:
Note
Do not remove the top
cover if the Base Cabinet
is the top cabinet.
Front
Cover
Remove this screw to
remove the front cover
Right
Side Cover
Front
Right
Loosen two screws
Loosen three screws
to remove the side covers
to remove front cover
(right and left side covers)
Top Cover
(Base Cabinet Only)
Front
Right
Back Cover
DK424 Installa
Right
Side
Cover
Remove four
screws to
remove back cover
tion
Loosen two screws
to remove the side cover
(right and left covers)
1457
Figure 5-6
DK424 Cabinet Cover Removal and Installation
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-15
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
Marking Hole
18.75 IN.
Trace Upper
Arch
10 IN.
Back Cover
1459
Figure 5-7
DK424 Back Cover Mounting Holes
Hang cabinet on back cover
then slide to right.
Hanger
Back Cover
Hanger Hole
Back Cover
Mounting Strip
Important! After mounting
cabinet to back cover
use two screws to
fasten cabinet to back
cover.
1460
Figure 5-8
DK424 Mounting Cabinet on Back Cover
5-16
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
Right Side
AC Power
Cables
Front
Bonding Connection
Plates
(Required for all wall
mounted expansion
cabinets on both
right and left sides)
DK424 Installa
RPSB1 or RPSB2
Power Strip
tion
1462
To AC Outlet
Figure 5-9
Right Side View of Cabinet Interior
Note
See "Outlet Strip (RPSB1 and RPSB2) Installation" on Page 5-34 for RPSB1
and RPSB2 cabinet locations.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-17
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
Cab 2 Cable
Left Side
Base Cabinet
CAB
2
CAB
3
CAB
4
Cable Guard
CAB
Screw
5
CAB
6
Cable Guard
CAB
7
PCB Cable
Data Cables
Expansion
Cabinet
Front
Data
Cable
Door
(shown open)
Expansion
Cabinet
5342
Bonding Connection Plate
(required for all wall mount
expansion cabinets)
To MDF
Remote Cabinet Cable
feed through hole
Figure 5-10 Left Side View of Cabinet Interior
5-18
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
R11
RCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
Printed Circuit
Board Cables
CABINET NO.
2
3
4
5
6
7
S_1
S_2
S_3
S_4
S_5
S_6
S_7
S_8
DK424 Installa
tion
1848
1848
Figure 5-11 Front View of DK424 Cabinet Interior
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-19
DK424 Installation
Wall Mounting
25-Pair
Knock Out Plastic
Amphenol
Cables
Top
A. Cables Run Out of Top of
To MDF
Cabinet(s)
B. Cables Run Out of Side of
Cabinet(s)
C. Cables Run Out of Bottom
of Cabinet(s)
25-Pair
Amphenol
To MDF
Cables
To MDF
25-Pair
1464
Amphenol Cables
Figure 5-12 DK424 Cabinet Cable Routing
5-20
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
Cabinet Floor Mounting
One or Two Cabinets
1. Remove front, side, and top covers from cabinet(s) (Figure 5-2). Remove plastic locating parts
from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver (Figure 5-6).
2. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (RPSU280) are installed per "Power Supply
Installation" on Page 5-8.
3. If installing just one cabinet, install the RFMF fixtures on each side of the bottom of the
cabinet (Figure 5-13) and place the cabinet where it should be installed (go to Step 6).
4. If installing two cabinets, install a floor fixture (RFMF1) on each side of the cabinet that will
be the bottom cabinet, making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge.
5. If installing two cabinets:
Set the bottom cabinet on the floor or mount surface, then set the top cabinet on the bottom
cabinet.
Fasten the two cabinets together with the four screws provided: (two screws at front "A"
and two at back "B" of cabinet. Place cabinet where it should be installed.
Connect the Expansion Cabinet data cable to the "CAB. 2" data cable connector on the
Base Cabinet (Figures 5-10 and 5-28).
...or if installing a Remote Expansion Cabinet: see details in Figure 5-41 on Page 5-62.
6. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the
"Recommended Installation Sequence" on Page 5-7.
7. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on cabinet(s) (Figure 5-11).
8. Reinstall covers on to cabinet(s).
Three or More Cabinets
This section shows you how to mount three or more cabinets to a concrete, wood or computer
room floor. Use the General Steps for all of these methods first, then the specific steps that follow
for each method.
1. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (RPSU280) are installed per "Power Supply
DK424 Installa
Installation" on Page 5-8.
2. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 5-2).
Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using Phillips screwdriver (Figure
5-5).
tion
3. Install a floor fixture (RFMF1) on each side of the bottom cabinet. (Make sure that the fixture
is inside of the cabinet edge. For Steps 3~10, see Figures 5-13~5-18.
4. Place cabinet two on top of the bottom cabinet and connect them together at points A and B
with the screws provided.
5. Place cabinet three on top of cabinet 2 and connect them together at points A and B with the
screws provided.
6. If installing more than three cabinets, install wall brackets (RWBF1) on the top of cabinet 3.
Position the 3 cabinets parallel to the wall (2 inches from the wall) and secure the wall
brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors as required.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-21
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
7. For systems with just three cabinets, secure the floor fixtures (already attached to the bottom
cabinet) to the floor with the customer-provided floor bolts.
8. Refer to the following sub-sections and anchor the system to concrete, wood, or computer
room floor. After completing those steps, proceed to Step 12. For systems with four or more
cabinets, skip this step and proceed to Step 9.
9. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and
B with the screws provided.
10. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF1) are installed
on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three.
11. Check to make sure the cabinets are parallel to the wall. Secure the floor fixtures attached to
the bottom cabinet to the floor with the customer-provided floor anchors.
12. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on
the Base Cabinet (Figures 5-10 and 5-28). (The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet
should be connected to the connector labeled "CAB. 2", the cable from the second Expansion
Cabinet to the "CAB. 3" connector, etc.)
13. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the
"Recommended Installation Sequence" on Page 5-7.
14. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet and reinstall covers on the cabinets.
(The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.)
5-22
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
Top Cabinet Wall
Securing Brackets
B
(RWBFIA)
(Left and
Right Side)
Front (2)
B
B Back (2) Mounting
Mounting
Screws Provided
B
Screws
A
with RFIF Kit
Provided
with RFIF Kit
B
B
A
B
A
B
A
Third Cabinet Wall
Securing Bracket
B
(RWBF1A)
(Left and right side)
A
B
A
B
Bottom Wall
RFMF
A
Securing Bracket
B
Mounting
1
(RWBF1A)
Screws
A
Anchor
A
Bolts (2)
B
DK424 Installa
Floor
Fixture
RFMF is
(RFMF1A)
inside of
cabinet edge
Anchor
RFMF
1849
Bolts (2)
Mounting Screws
tion
Figure 5-13 DK424 Cabinet Floor Installation
Important!
RFMF1A (two-each) and RWBF1A (six-each) are supplied with the floor installation kit RFIF.
Upper and third cabinets must be fixed to the wall with RWBFS on each side (use #12 x 1.25
wood screws and wall anchors, as required).
Floor fixture (RFMF) must be fixed to floor by either anchor bolts, or wall by RWBF wall
brackets (see Figures 5-14 and 5-15).
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-23
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
RWBF
;;
;;
RWBF
A
B
RWBF
;
;
;;
RWBFs are used on left and
A
B
A
B
;;
;;
right sides, wherever indicated
RWBF
"A"
;;
;
A
B
A
B
;;;
Front two
A
B
RWBF
screws left
and right sides
;
;;
;;
A
B
A
B
A
B
RWBF
A
B
RWBF
RWBF
RWBF
;
;;
;;;
;;;
;
"B"
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Back two
;;
;;
screws left
and right sides
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
;;
;
Customer-
;;
supplied
anchor bolts
;
;;
;
(each side)
RFMF
RFMF
RFMF
RFMF
RFMF
2705
;
;
;
;
RFMFs are used on left and
right sides, wherever indicated
;
;;
;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;;
Note RWBF1A (3-pairs) and RFMF1A (1-pair) are supplied with floor installation kit RFIF.
Figure 5-14 Floor Mounting Cabinets (Bolted to the Floor)
;
RWBF
;
;;;
;
RWBF
A
B
RWBF
;
RWBFs are used on left and
right sides, wherever indicated
A
B
A
B
RWBF
;;
;
;
;
;;
A
B
A
B
A
B
RWBF
;;
;
;
"A"
Front two
screws, left
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
;;
;
;;;
and right sides
RWBF
RWBF
;;;
RWBF
RWBF
RWBF
;;
;;
"B"
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Back two
screws, left
;;
;;;
;
and right sides
;;;
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
RWBF
;;
;;
RWBF
RWBF
RWBF
RFMF
RFMF
RFMF
RFMF
RFMF
;
;
;
;
1850
RFMFs are used on left and
;;;;
;;
;;
right sides, wherever indicated
;;
;;;;
;;
;;
Note RWBF1A (3-pairs) and RFMF1A (1-pair) are supplied with floor installation kit RFIF.
;;
Figure 5-15 Floor Mounting Cabinets, (Not Bolted to the Floor)
5-24
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
Bolt Cabinets to a Concrete Floor
1. Mount the DK424 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (see Figures 5-13 and 5-16).
2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location.
3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling.
Note
Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust
created during drilling.
4. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors.
5. Install the bolt anchors, with plugs, in the drilled holes.
6. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor.
7. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor.
8. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using bolts, lock washers, and flat washers.
Bottom
Cabinet
BFIF
(Floor
mount
Bolt
fixture)
Lockwasher
Concrete
Bolt Anchor
Floor
Plug
1467
Figure 5-16 Floor Mount Installation Concrete Floor
Bolt Cabinets to a Wooden Floor
DK424 Installa
1. Mount the DK424 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (RFMF). See Figures 5-13 and 5-17.
2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location.
3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling.
tion
Note
Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust
created during drilling.
4. Drill pilot holes to make insertion of 3/8 inch lag bolts easier, and to prevent splitting of wood
flooring.
5. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor.
6. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using lag bolts, lock washers, and flat washers.
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-25
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
Bolt Cabinets to a Computer Room Floor
Base
Cabinet
BFIF
(Floor
mount
Bolt
fixture)
Lockwasher
Wooden
Floor
1468
Figure 5-17 Floor Mount Installation Wooden Floor
1. Mount the DK424 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (RFMF). See Figures 5-13 and 5-18.
2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location.
3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling.
Note
Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust
created during drilling.
4. Drill holes through tile for 3/8-inch threaded rods.
5. After the tiles have been drilled, insert threaded rods through the holes in the tile and mark the
concrete floor directly beneath the holes in the tiles.
6. Remove the tiles. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors.
7. Install the bolt anchors with plugs in the drilled holes.
8. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor.
9. Screw threaded rods into each bolt anchor.
10. Install a hex nut, lock washer, and flat washer on each threaded rod. Screw the nuts down far
enough to allow floor tiles to be replaced over the threaded rods.
11. Replace tiles over threaded rods in their original positions on the floor.
12. Reach under the tiles, and screw the hex nuts upward until the flat washers are touching the
bottom of the tile.
13. Use a hack saw to cut the threaded rods at a height of approximately 1.5 inches above the floor
tile.
14. Move the Base Cabinet into position over the threaded rods.
15. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using flat washers, lock washer, and hex nuts on each
threaded rod.
5-26
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
Cabinet Floor Mounting
Bottom
Cabinet
BFIF
(Floor
mount
fixture)
Floor Tiles
Flat Washer
Lock Washer
Lead Anchors
Hex Nut
Concrete
1469
Figure 5-18 Floor Mount Installation Computer Room Floor
Mount Cabinets to Computer Room Floor (Unbolted)
1. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (RPSU280) are installed per "Power Supply
Installation" on Page 5-8.
2. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 5-2).
Note
As shown in Figure 5-18, the two screws on each side cover and the three screws on the
front cover (the bottom left screw must be completely removed) should only be loosened
and the covers slid to the right for removal.
Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver
(Figure 5-5).
3. Install a floor fixture (RFMF1) on each side of the bottom cabinet (Figures 5-12 and 5-14),
making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge.
DK424 Installa
4. Secure a wall bracket (RWBF1) to both floor fixtures with the screws provided. Secure the
wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors.
5. Place a cabinet on top of the bottom cabinet and connect the cabinets together at points A and
B with the screws provided.
6. Install wall brackets (RWBF1) on the top of cabinet three and secure them to the wall with
tion
customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors.
7. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and
B with screws provided.
8. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF1) are installed
on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three.
9. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on
the Base Cabinet (Figures 5-10 and 5-28). The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet
should be connected to the connector labeled "CAB. 2", the cable from the second Expansion
Cabinet to the "CAB. 3" connector, etc.)
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-27
DK424 Installation
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
10. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the
"Recommended Installation Sequence" on Page 5-7.
11. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet (see Figure 5-11), then reinstall
covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.)
Cabinet Removal Floor-Mounted Systems
This procedure is written on the presumption that the Base Cabinet is the bottom cabinet of
systems with two or more cabinets.
1. Turn the system power Off, and remove the front and side covers from the cabinet to be
replaced and any cabinets above it. Remove the top cover from the top cabinet if it is to be
replaced (Figure 5-6).
2. Unplug the AC power cord of the cabinet and any reserve power cabling connected to the
power supply. Repeat this procedure for each cabinet above the cabinet to be replaced.
3. If a power strip (RPSB1 or RPSB2) (Figure 5-19), Conduit Connection Box (RCCB1 or
RCCB2), or Battery Distribution Box (RBDB1 or RBDB2) is connected to the cabinet,
remove it (Figures 5-23 and 5-26).
4. If the cabinet to be replaced is the Base Cabinet (DKSUB424), disconnect all data cables
connected to the Base Cabinet data cable connector.
5. If the cabinet to be replaced is an Expansion Cabinet (DKSUE424), disconnect the data cable
of the cabinet from the data cable connector on the Base Cabinet. Repeat this procedure for all
Expansion Cabinets above the cabinet to be replaced.
6. Disconnect any intercabinet ground wiring or system ground wiring connected to the cabinet.
Repeat this procedure for any cabinets above the cabinet to be replaced.
7. Remove any cabinets above the cabinet to be replaced, and then remove the cabinet to be
replaced.
Cabinet Replacement
To replace cabinets, refer to "Cabinet Floor Mounting" on Page 5-21.
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation and safety. The AC power cord(s)
already contains a conductor for the "third wire ground" provided by the commercial power outlet.
An insulated conductor must connect the frame ground terminal on the Base Cabinet (or the
bottom Expansion Cabinet) to a cold water pipe or the building ground.
Notes
The "third wire ground" ("A" in Figure 5-28) must be dedicated. The conductor connected to
the frame ground must comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of
the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, but must not depend on the cord and plug of the
system.
WARNING!
Failure to provide ground may be a safety hazard or lead to confusing trouble
symptoms and, in extreme cases, system failure.
5-28
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
AC Power and Grounding Requirements
AC Power and Third Wire Ground Test
Test each "third wire ground" separately for continuity by either measuring the resistance between
the third prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm) or by using
a commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the
following procedure.
To test each "third wire ground" for continuity
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the
following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage.
1. Obtain suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC.
2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires)
on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground, point A in Figures 5-21
and 5-22). Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained.
4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe
to the second voltage terminal.
CAUTION!
If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to
green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit
Steps 5 and 6, and proceed directly to Step 7.
5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal and a reading of 100~125VAC on the other terminal
is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet.
6. Set the meter to the "OHMS/Rx1" scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other
probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than
one ohm.
CAUTION!
If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded.
If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly
grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National
DK424 Installa
Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected.
To test the frame ground conductor for continuity
tion
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the
following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage.
1. Disconnect the AC plug(s) of the system to make sure that the separate earth ground paths are
separated.
2. With a suitable volt/ohm meter, perform a reading between points "A" and "B" shown in
Figures 5-21, 5-22 and 5-28. Verify that the readings do not exceed the figures listed below. If
they do, the condition must be corrected by a qualified electrician before the system is
connected.
A to B: 1 volt maximum then A to B: 1 ohm maximum
Strata DK I&M 5/00
5-29
DK424 Installation
AC Power Cabling Installation
Intercabinet Ground
Connect intercabinet ground wires (supplied with each cabinet) between cabinets in systems with
two or more cabinets (Figures 5-21 and 5-22).
AC Power Cabling Installation
The system requires an input power source of 50/60 cycles, 115VAC ± 10VAC, and up to 17.5
amps AC to operate. AC power cabling requirements vary, depending on the method of cabinet
installation and the number of cabinets. Refer "Summary of Electrical/Environmental
Characteristics" on Page 5-4 for electrical power requirements.
Some floor-mounted configurations and all wall-mounted configurations require AC outlets,
which must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. To avoid accidental turn off, do not
configure the outlet with an On/Off switch.
AC Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount)
Refer to the following instructions to install AC power cabling to floor or wall-mounted systems
with just one or two cabinets:
1. Make sure all power supply (RPSU280) switches are in the Off position.
2. If two cabinets are installed and local electrical code allows only one AC power cord from the
system, install the RPSB2 in the bottom cabinet per Figures 5-19 and 5-20.
3. For AC power cords that will be plugged directly into a wall outlet: Undo the tie wrap that
keeps the cord coiled. Plug female end of the cord into the power supply, and plug the male
end into the wall outlet.
4. For AC power cords that will be plugged into power strips: Do not undo the tie wrap that
keeps the cord coiled. Plug female end of the cord into the power supply, and plug the male
end into the RPSB power strip. Plug the power strip power cord into a wall outlet (see Figure
5-9).
Note
Power Supply testing procedures are provided in Chapter 14 Fault Finding, which
should be referred to if it is suspected that the power supply does not work properly.
5-30
Strata DK I&M 5/00
DK424 Installation
AC Power Cabling Installation
AC Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount)
Local electrical codes specify that a maximum of one or two AC power cords from the system can
be plugged into wall outlets. Systems with three or more cabinets must be equipped with power
strips (RPSB1 or RPSB2) to adhere to this requirement. Each power strip has three outlets and an
AC power cord.
Three- or four-cabinet systems require one power strip, while five- to seven-cabinet systems
require two or three power strips, depending on local electrical code requirements pertaining to the
number of AC power cords (one or two) allowed from the system.
To install AC power cabling to